543/2011/EU: Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 543/2011 of 7 June 2011 laying down detailed rules for the application of Council Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 in respect of the fruit and vegetables and processed fruit and vegetables sectors
Date: 2011-06-07
Institutions: European Commission
Subjects: common organisation of markets, food processing, fruit, marketing, retail selling




L_2011157EN.01000101.xml










15.6.2011   


EN


Official Journal of the European Union


L 157/1








            COMMISSION IMPLEMENTING REGULATION (EU) No 543/2011
of 7 June 2011
         
laying down detailed rules for the application of Council Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 in respect of the fruit and vegetables and processed fruit and vegetables sectors


THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION,

Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union,


Having regard to Council Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 of 22 October 2007 establishing a common organisation of agricultural markets and on specific provisions for certain agricultural products (Single CMO Regulation) (1), and in particular the second subparagraph of Article 3, Articles 103h, 121(a), 127, 134, 143(b), 148, 179, 192(2), 194 and 203a(8) in conjunction with Article 4 thereof,

Whereas:







(1)


Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 establishes a common organisation of agricultural markets which includes the fruit and vegetables and processed fruit and vegetables sectors.












(2)


The implementing rules covering the fruit and vegetables and processed fruit and vegetables sectors are laid down in Commission Regulation (EC) No 1580/2007 of 21 December 2007 laying down implementing rules of Council Regulations (EC) No 2200/96, (EC) No 2201/96 and (EC) No 1182/2007 in the fruit and vegetable sector (2). That Regulation has been amended several times. In the interests of clarity, it is appropriate to incorporate all the implementing rules in a new Regulation, together with the amendments necessary in the light of experience, and to repeal Regulation (EC) No 1580/2007.












(3)


Marketing years should be set for products of the fruit and vegetables and the processed fruit and vegetables sectors. Since there are no longer any aid schemes in the sectors which follow the harvesting cycle of the products concerned, all marketing years may be harmonised to fit the calendar year.












(4)


Article 113(1)(b) and (c) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 authorises the Commission to provide for marketing standards for fruit and vegetables and processed fruit and vegetables, respectively. Pursuant to Article 113a(1) of that Regulation, fruit and vegetables which are intended to be sold fresh to the consumer, may only be marketed if they are of sound, fair and marketable quality and if the country of origin is indicated. To harmonise the implementation of that provision, it is appropriate to set out details of and provide for a general marketing standard for all fresh fruit and vegetables.












(5)


Specific marketing standards should be adopted for those products for which it seems necessary to adopt a standard based on an assessment of its relevance, taking into account, in particular, which products are most traded in value terms on the basis of the figures held in the European Commission’s reference database on international trade, Comext.












(6)


In order to avoid unnecessary barriers to trade, where specific marketing standards are to be laid down for individual products, these standards should be those as set out in the standards adopted by the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE). Where no specific marketing standard has been adopted at Union level, products should be considered as conforming to the general marketing standard where the holder is able to show that the products are in conformity with any applicable UNECE standard.












(7)


Exceptions and exemptions from the application of marketing standards should be provided for in the case of certain operations which are either very marginal and/or specific, or take place at the start of the distribution chain, or in the case of dried fruit and vegetables and products intended for processing. Since some products will naturally develop and have a tendency to perish, they should be permitted to show a slight lack of freshness and turgidity, provided they are not in ‘Extra’ Class. Certain products which are normally not intact when sold should be exempted from the general marketing standard which would otherwise require this.












(8)


The information particulars required by marketing standards should be clearly displayed on the packaging and/or label. To avoid fraud and cases of misleading consumers, the information particulars required by the standards should be available to consumers before purchase, especially in case of distance selling, where experience has shown the risks of fraud and avoidance of the consumer protection offered by the standards.












(9)


Packages containing different species of fruit and vegetables are becoming more common on the market in response to demand from certain consumers. Fair trading requires that fruit and vegetables sold in the same package are of uniform quality. For products for which Union standards have not been adopted this can be ensured by recourse to general provisions. Labelling requirements should be laid down for mixes of different species of fruit and vegetables in the same package. They should be less strict than those laid down by the marketing standards in order to take into account, in particular, the space available on the label.












(10)


In order to ensure that checks may be properly and effectively carried out, invoices and accompanying documents, other than those for consumers, should contain certain basic information included in the marketing standards.












(11)


For the purposes of the selective checks, based on risk analysis, as provided for in Article 113a(4) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 it is necessary to lay down detailed rules on such checks. In particular, the role of the risk assessment when selecting products for checks should be underlined.












(12)


Each Member State should designate the inspection bodies responsible for carrying out conformity checks at each stage of marketing. One of those bodies should be responsible for contacts with and coordination between all other designated bodies.












(13)


Since knowledge of traders and their main characteristics is an indispensable tool in Member States’ analysis, it is essential to set up a database on traders of fruit and vegetables in each Member State. In order to ensure that all actors in the marketing chain are covered and for the sake of legal certainty, a detailed definition of ‘trader’ should be adopted.












(14)


Conformity checks should be carried out by sampling and should concentrate on traders most likely to have goods which do not comply with the standards. Taking into account the characteristics of their national markets, Member States should lay down rules prioritising checks on particular categories of traders. For the sake of transparency, those rules should be notified to the Commission.












(15)


Member States should ensure that exports of fruits and vegetables to third countries conform to the marketing standards and should certify conformity, in accordance with the Geneva Protocol on standardisation of fresh fruit and vegetables and dry and dried fruit concluded within the UNECE and the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) Scheme for the application of international standards for fruit and vegetables.












(16)


Imports of fruit and vegetables from third countries should conform to the marketing standards or to standards equivalent to them. Conformity checks must therefore be carried out before those goods enter the customs territory of the Union, except in the case of small lots which the inspection bodies consider to be low risk. In certain third countries which provide satisfactory guarantees of conformity, pre-export checks may be carried out by the inspection bodies of those third countries. Where this option is applied, Member States should regularly verify the effectiveness and quality of the pre-export checks carried out by third country inspection bodies.












(17)


Fruit and vegetables intended for processing are not required to conform to marketing standards, so it should be ensured that they are not sold on the market for fresh products. Such products should be appropriately labelled.












(18)


Fruit and vegetables checked for conformity with the marketing standards should be subject to the same type of check at all stages of marketing. To this end, the inspection guidelines recommended by the UNECE in line with the relevant OECD recommendations, should be applied. Specific arrangements should, however, be laid down for checks at the retail sale stage.












(19)


Provisions for the recognition of producer organisations for the products they request should be laid down. Where the recognition is requested for products intended solely for processing, it should be ensured that they are indeed delivered for processing.












(20)


In order to help achieve the goals of the fruit and vegetables regime and to ensure that producer organisations carry out their work in a sustainable and effective way, there should be the utmost stability within producer organisations. Membership of a producer in the producer organisation should therefore be for a minimum period. It should be left up to Member States to lay down the notice periods and the dates on which resignation from membership are to take effect.












(21)


The main and essential activities of a producer organisation should relate to the concentration of supply and marketing. However, producer organisations should be allowed to engage in other activities, whether or not of a commercial nature.












(22)


Cooperation between producer organisations should be encouraged by allowing the marketing of fruit and vegetables bought exclusively from another recognised producer organisation to be left out of the calculations both for the purposes of the main activity and for other activities. Where a producer organisation is recognised for a product for which the provision of technical means is required, it should be allowed to provide those means through its members, through subsidiaries or by outsourcing.












(23)


Producer organisations may hold shares in subsidiaries which help to increase the added value of the production of their members. Rules should be fixed for calculating the value of such marketed production. The main activities of such subsidiaries should be the same as those of the producer organisation, after allowing for a transitional period for adaptation.












(24)


Detailed rules should be laid down on the recognition and functioning of the associations of producer organisations, transnational producer organisations and transnational associations of producer organisations provided for in Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007. For the sake of consistency, they should, as far as possible, reflect the rules laid down for producer organisations.












(25)


In order to facilitate the concentration of supply, the merger of existing producer organisations to form new ones should be encouraged by providing rules for the merger of operational programmes of the merged organisations.












(26)


While respecting the principles whereby a producer organisation must be formed on the own initiative of producers and scrutinised by the producers, it should be left up to Member States to lay down the conditions whereby other natural or legal persons are accepted as members of a producer organisation and/or an association of producer organisations.












(27)


In order to ensure that producer organisations genuinely represent a minimum number of producers, Member States should take measures to ensure that a minority of members who may account for the bulk of production in the producer organisation do not unduly dominate its management and operation.












(28)


In order to take account of different production and marketing circumstances in the Union, Member States should lay down certain conditions for the granting of preliminary recognition to producer groups which submit a recognition plan.












(29)


To promote the setting-up of stable producer organisations capable of making a lasting contribution to the attainment of the objectives of the fruit and vegetables regime, preliminary recognition should be granted only to producer groups which can demonstrate their ability to meet all the requirements for recognition within a specified time limit.












(30)


Provisions on information which the producer groups must provide in the recognition plan should be laid down. To enable producer groups to better meet the recognition conditions, changes to recognition plans should be authorised. To that end, provisions should be laid down enabling Member States to request from producer groups to take corrective action to ensure that their plan is implemented.












(31)


The producer group may satisfy the conditions for recognition before the recognition plan is completed. Provision should be made to allow such groups to submit applications for recognition along with draft operational programmes. For the sake of consistency, the granting of such recognition to a producer group must signify the termination of its recognition plan, and the aid provided for should be discontinued. However, to take account of the multiannual financing of investments, investments qualifying for investment aid should be able to be carried over to operational programmes.












(32)


To facilitate the correct application of the system of aid to cover the costs of formation and administrative operation of producer groups, that aid should be granted at a flat rate. That flat-rate aid should be subject to a ceiling in order to comply with budgetary constraints. Moreover, taking into account the differing financial needs of producer groups of different sizes, that ceiling should be adjusted in line with the value of marketable production of the producer groups.












(33)


For the sake of consistency and a smooth transition to the status of a recognised producer group, the same rules on main activities of producer organisations and their value of marketed production should apply to producer groups.












(34)


In order to take into account the financial needs of the new producers groups and to ensure the correct application of the aid scheme in the event of mergers, the possibility should be given for the aid to be granted to the producer groups resulting from the merger.












(35)


To facilitate the use of the scheme of support to operational programmes, the marketed production of producer organisations should be clearly defined, including the specification of which products may be taken into account and the marketing stage at which the value of production is to be calculated. For control purposes and for the sake of simplification, it is appropriate to use a flat rate for the purposes of calculating the value of fruit and vegetables intended for processing, representing the value of the basic product, namely fruit and vegetables intended for processing, and activities which do not amount to genuine processing activities. Since the volumes of fruit and vegetables needed for the production of processed fruit and vegetables differ largely between groups of products, those differences should be reflected in the applicable flat rates. In the case of fruit and vegetables intended for processing that are transformed into processed aromatic herbs and paprika powder, it is also appropriate to introduce a flat rate for the purposes of calculating the value of fruit and vegetables intended for processing, representing only the value of the basic product. Additional methods of calculation of marketable production should also be made possible in case of yearly fluctuations or insufficient data. To prevent misuse of the scheme, producer organisations should not in general be permitted to change the methodology for fixing reference periods within the duration of a programme.












(36)


In order to ensure the smooth transition to the new system for the calculation of the value of the marketed production for fruit and vegetables intended for processing, operational programmes approved by 20 January 2010 should not be affected by the new calculation method, without prejudice to the possibility to amend those operational programmes in accordance with Articles 65 and 66 of Regulation (EC) No 1580/2007. For the same reason, the value of the marketed production for the reference period of operational programmes approved after that date should be calculated under the new rules.












(37)


To ensure the correct use of aid, rules should be laid down for the management of operational funds and members’ financial contributions, allowing for as much flexibility as possible on condition that all producers may take advantage of the operational fund and may democratically participate in decisions on its use.












(38)


Provisions should be laid down establishing the scope and structure of the national strategy for sustainable operational programmes and the national framework for environmental actions. The aim shall be to optimise the allocation of financial resources and to improve the quality of the strategy.












(39)


In order to allow appropriate evaluation of the information by the competent authorities and measures and activities to be included in, or excluded from, the programmes, procedures for the presentation and approval of operational programmes, including deadlines, should be laid down. Since the programmes are managed on an annual basis, it should be provided that programmes not approved before a given date are postponed for a year.












(40)


There should be a procedure for the annual amendment of operational programmes for the following year, so that they can be adjusted to take account of any new conditions which could not have been foreseen when they were initially presented. In addition, it should be possible for measures and amounts of the operational fund to be changed during each year of execution of a programme. To ensure that the approved programmes maintain their overall objectives, all such changes should be subject to certain limits and conditions to be defined by Member States and including obligatory notification of changes to the competent authorities.












(41)


For reasons of financial security and legal certainty, a list of operations and expenditure which may not be covered by operational programmes should be drawn up.












(42)


In the case of investments on individual holdings, so as to prevent the unjustified enrichment of a private party who has severed links with the organisation during the useful life of the investment, provisions should be laid down to allow the organisation to recover the residual value of the investment, whether such an investment is owned by a member or by the organisation.












(43)


To ensure the correct application of the aid scheme, information to be included in the applications for aid as well as procedures for the payment of aid should be laid down. To prevent cash-flow difficulties, a system of advance payments accompanied by appropriate securities should be available to producer organisations. For similar reasons, an alternative system should be available for the reimbursement of expenditure already incurred.












(44)


The production of fruit and vegetables is unpredictable and the products are perishable. Surplus on the market, even if it is not too great, can significantly disturb the market. Detailed provisions on the scope and application of crisis management and prevention measures in respect of the products referred to in Article 1(1)(i) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 should be laid down. As far as possible, those rules should provide for flexibility and for rapid application in crises and therefore should allow decisions to be taken by Member States and producer organisations themselves. Nevertheless, the rules should prevent abuses and provide for limits on the use of certain measures, including in financial terms. They should also ensure that phytosanitary and environmental requirements are duly respected.












(45)


As regards withdrawals from the market, detailed rules should be adopted taking into account the potential importance of that measure. In particular, rules should be drawn up concerning the system of increased support for fruit and vegetables withdrawn from the market which are distributed free of charge as humanitarian aid by charitable organisations and certain other establishments and institutions. In order to facilitate free distribution, it is appropriate to provide for the possibility to allow charitable organisations and institutions to ask a symbolic contribution from the final recipients of the withdrawn products, in case those products have undergone processing. In addition, maximum levels of support for market withdrawals should be fixed in order to ensure that they do not become a permanent alternative outlet for products compared to placing them on the market. In this context, for those products for which maximum levels of Union withdrawal compensation were set in Annex V to Council Regulation (EC) No 2200/96 of 28 October 1996 on the common organization of the market in fruit and vegetables (3), it is appropriate to continue using such levels, subject to a certain degree of increase to reflect the fact that those withdrawals are now co-financed. For other products, where experience has not yet shown any risk of excessive withdrawals, it is appropriate to allow Member States to fix maximum levels of support. In all cases, however, for similar reasons, it is appropriate to set a quantitative limit of withdrawals per product per producer organisation.












(46)


Detailed rules should be adopted concerning the national financial assistance which Member States may grant in regions of the Union where the degree of organisation of producers is particularly low, including defining such low degree of organisation. Procedures for the approval of such national aid as well as for the approval and the amount of the reimbursement of the aid by the Union should be provided for, as well as for the proportion of reimbursement. Those procedures should reflect those currently applicable.












(47)


Detailed rules, in particular procedural provisions, should be adopted concerning the conditions under which the rules issued by producer organisations or associations of such organisations in the fruit and vegetables sector may be extended to all producers established in a specific economic area. Where produce is sold on the tree, it should be made clear which rules are to be extended to the producers and the buyers, respectively.












(48)


In order to monitor the imports of apples and to ensure that a significant increase of imports of apples would not go unnoticed within a relatively short period of time, the system of import licenses for apples falling within Combined Nomenclature code (CN code) 0808 10 80  had been introduced in 2006 as a transitional system. Meanwhile, new and accurate means of monitoring imports of apples have been developed, which are less cumbersome for traders than the current licence system. Therefore, the obligation to present import licences for apples falling within CN code 0808 10 80  should cease to apply within a short period of time.












(49)


Detailed rules concerning the entry price system for fruit and vegetables should be adopted. Since most of the perishable fruit and vegetables concerned are supplied on consignment, this creates special difficulties for determining their value. The possible methods for the calculation of the entry price on the basis of which imported products are classified in the Common Customs Tariff should be set. In particular, standard import values should be established on the basis of the weighted average of the average prices for the products and special provision should be made for cases in which no prices are available for products of a given origin. There should be provision for the lodging of a security in certain circumstances to ensure that the system is correctly applied.












(50)


Detailed rules concerning the import duty which can be imposed on certain products in addition to that provided for in the Common Customs Tariff should be adopted. The additional duty may be imposed if import volumes of the products concerned exceed trigger levels determined for the product and the period of application. Goods en route to the Union are exempt from additional duty and, therefore, specific provisions for such goods should be adopted.












(51)


Provision should be made for appropriate monitoring and evaluation of ongoing programmes and schemes in order to assess their effectiveness and efficiency by both producer organisations and Member States.












(52)


Provisions concerning the type, format and means of notifications necessary to implement this Regulation should be laid down. Those provisions should include notifications from producers and producer organisations to the Member States and from the Member States to the Commission, as well as the consequences resulting from late or inaccurate notifications.












(53)


Measures should be laid down as regards the checks necessary to ensure the proper application of this Regulation and Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, and the appropriate sanctions applicable to irregularities found. Those measures should involve both specific checks and sanctions laid down at Union level as well as additional national checks and sanctions. The checks and sanctions should be dissuasive, effective and proportionate. Rules should be provided for resolving cases of obvious error, force majeure and other exceptional circumstances to ensure fair treatment of producers. Rules for artificially created situations should be provided for in order to avoid any benefit being derived from such situations.












(54)


Provisions should be laid down to continue the smooth transition from the previous system set out in Regulation (EC) No 2200/96, Council Regulation (EC) No 2201/96 of 28 October 1996 on the common organisation of the markets in processed fruit and vegetable products (4), and Council Regulation (EC) No 2202/96 of 28 October 1996 introducing a Community aid scheme for producers of certain citrus fruits (5) to the new system set out in Council Regulation (EC) No 1182/2007 of 26 September 2007 laying down specific rules as regards the fruit and vegetable sector, amending Directives 2001/112/EC and 2001/113/EC and Regulations (EEC) No 827/68, (EC) No 2200/96, (EC) No 2201/96, (EC) No 2826/2000, (EC) No 1782/2003 and (EC) No 318/2006 and repealing Regulation (EC) No 2202/96 (6) and subsequently Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 and in Regulation (EC) No 1580/2007 and subsequently this Regulation and the implementation of the transitional rules set out in Article 203a of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.












(55)


In order to limit the effects of the abolition of the system of import licences for apples on trade patterns, Article 134 of Regulation (EC) No 1580/2007 should continue to apply until 31 August 2011.












(56)


The Management Committee for the Common Organisation of Agricultural Markets has not delivered an opinion within the time limit set by its Chairman,





HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:



TITLE I


INTRODUCTORY PROVISIONS



Article 1

Scope and use of terms


1.   This Regulation lays down implementing rules for Regulation 1234/2007 as regards the fruit and vegetables and processed fruit and vegetables sectors.
However, Titles II and III of this Regulation shall only apply in respect of products of the fruit and vegetables sector as referred to in Article 1(1)(i) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 and of such products intended solely for processing.


2.   Terms used in Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall have the same meaning when used in this Regulation unless this Regulation provides otherwise.



Article 2

Marketing years

The marketing years for fruit and vegetables and processed fruit and vegetables shall run from 1 January to 31 December.



TITLE II


CLASSIFICATION OF PRODUCTS




CHAPTER I




General rules




Article 3

Marketing standards; holders


1.   The requirements of Article 113a(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall be the general marketing standard. The details of the general marketing standard are set out in Part A of Annex I to this Regulation.
Fruit and vegetables not covered by a specific marketing standard shall conform to the general marketing standard. However, where the holder is able to show that the products are in conformity with any applicable standards adopted by the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE), they shall be considered as conforming to the general marketing standard.


2.   The specific marketing standards referred to in Article 113(1)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 are set out in Part B of Annex I to this Regulation as regards the following products:






(a)


apples,










(b)


citrus fruit,










(c)


kiwifruit,










(d)


lettuces, curled leaved and broad-leaved endives,










(e)


peaches and nectarines,










(f)


pears,










(g)


strawberries,










(h)


sweet peppers,










(i)


table grapes,










(j)


tomatoes.






3.   For the purposes of Article 113a(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, ‘holder’ means any natural or legal person who is in physical possession of the products concerned.



Article 4

Exceptions and exemptions from the application of marketing standards


1.   By way of derogation from Article 113a(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, the following products shall not be required to conform to the marketing standards:






(a)


provided they are clearly marked with the words ‘intended for processing’ or ‘for animal feed’ or any other equivalent wording, products:






(i)


intended for industrial processing, or










(ii)


intended for animal feed or other non-food use;














(b)


products transferred by the producer on his holding to consumers for their personal use;










(c)


products recognised in a Commission Decision taken at the request of a Member State in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 195(2) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 as products of a given region which are sold by the retail trade of the region for well established traditional local consumption;










(d)


products having undergone a trimming or cutting making them ‘ready to eat’ or ‘kitchen ready’.










(e)


products marketed as edible sprouts, following germination of seeds of plants classified as fruit and vegetables under Article 1(1)(i) and Part IX of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.






2.   By way of derogation from Article 113a(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, the following products shall not be required to conform to the marketing standards within a given production area:






(a)


products sold or delivered by the grower to preparation and packaging stations or storage facilities, or shipped from his holding to such stations; and










(b)


products shipped from storage facilities to preparation and packaging stations.






3.   By way of derogation from Article 113a(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, Member States may exempt from the specific marketing standards products presented for retail sale to consumers for their personal use and labelled ‘product intended for processing’ or with any other equivalent wording and intended for processing other than those referred to in paragraph 1(a)(i) of this Article.


4.   By way of derogation from Article 113a(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, Member States may exempt from the marketing standards products directly sold by the producer to the final consumer for personal use on markets reserved only for producers within a given production area defined by Member States.


5.   By way of derogation from Article 113a(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 as regards the specific marketing standards, fruit and vegetables other than the ‘Extra’ Class, at stages following dispatch, may show a slight lack of freshness and turgidity and slight deterioration due to their development and their tendency to perish.


6.   By way of derogation from Article 113a(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, the following products shall not be required to conform to the general marketing standard:






(a)


non-cultivated mushrooms of CN code 0709 59 ,










(b)


capers of CN code 0709 90 40 ,










(c)


bitter almonds of CN code 0802 11 10 ,










(d)


shelled almonds of CN code 0802 12 ,










(e)


shelled hazelnuts of CN code 0802 22 ,










(f)


shelled walnuts of CN code 0802 32 ,










(g)


pine nuts of CN code 0802 90 50 ,










(h)


pistachios of CN code 0802 50 00 ,










(i)


macadamia of CN code 0802 60 00 ,










(j)


pecans of CN code ex 0802 90 20 ,










(k)


other nuts of CN code 0802 90 85 ,










(l)


dried plantains of CN code 0803 00 90 ,










(m)


dried citrus of CN code 0805 ,










(n)


mixtures of tropical nuts of CN code 0813 50 31 ,










(o)


mixtures of other nuts of CN code 0813 50 39 ,










(p)


saffron of CN code 0910 20 .






7.   Evidence shall be supplied to the competent authority of the Member State that the products covered by paragraphs 1(a) and 2 fulfil the conditions laid down, in particular with regard to their intended use.



Article 5

Information particulars


1.   The information particulars required by this Chapter shall be shown legibly and obviously on one side of the packaging, either indelibly printed directly onto the package or on a label which is an integral part of the package or affixed to it.


2.   For goods shipped in bulk and loaded directly onto a means of transport, the information particulars referred to in paragraph 1 shall be given in a document accompanying the goods or shown on a notice placed in an obvious position inside the means of transport.


3.   In the case of distance contracts within the meaning of Article 2(1) of Directive 97/7/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (7), conformity with the marketing standards shall require that the information particulars shall be available before the purchase is concluded.


4.   Invoices and accompanying documents, excluding receipts for the consumer, shall indicate the name and the country of origin of the products and, where appropriate, the class, the variety or commercial type if required in a specific marketing standard, or the fact that it is intended for processing.



Article 6

Information particulars at the retail stage


1.   At retail stage, the information particulars required by this Chapter shall be legible and conspicuous. Products may be presented for sale provided the retailer displays prominently, adjacent to and legibly the information particulars relating to country of origin and, where appropriate, class and variety or commercial type in such a way as not to mislead the consumer.


2.   For products which are pre-packaged within the meaning of Directive 2000/13/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (8), the net weight shall be indicated, in addition to all the information provided for in the marketing standards. However, in the case of products sold by number, the requirement to indicate the net weight shall not apply if the number of items may be clearly seen and easily counted from the outside or, if the number is indicated on the label.



Article 7

Mixes


1.   The marketing of packages of a net weight of 5 kg or less containing mixes of different species of fruit and vegetables shall be allowed, provided that:






(a)


the products are of uniform quality and each product concerned complies with the relevant specific marketing standard or, where no specific marketing standard exists for a particular product, the general marketing standard,










(b)


the package is appropriately labelled, in accordance with this Chapter, and










(c)


the mix is not such as to mislead the consumer.






2.   The requirements of paragraph 1(a) shall not apply to products included in a mix which are not products of the fruit and vegetables sector referred to in Article 1(1)(i) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.


3.   If the fruit and vegetables in a mix originate in more than one Member State or third country, the full names of the countries of origin may be replaced with one of the following, as appropriate:






(a)


‘mix of EU fruit and vegetables’,










(b)


‘mix of non- EU fruit and vegetables’,










(c)


‘mix of EU and non-EU fruit and vegetables’.









CHAPTER II




Checks on conformity to marketing standards





Section 1




General provisions




Article 8

Scope

This Chapter lays down rules on conformity checks, which shall mean the checks carried out on fruit and vegetables at all marketing stages, in order to verify that they conform to the marketing standards and other provisions of this Title and of Articles 113 and 113a of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.


Article 9

Coordinating authorities and inspection bodies


1.   Each Member State shall designate:






(a)


a single competent authority responsible for coordination and contacts in the areas covered by this Chapter, hereinafter called ‘the coordinating authority’; and










(b)


an inspection body or bodies responsible for the application of this Chapter, hereinafter called ‘the inspection bodies’.




The coordinating authorities and inspection bodies referred to in the first subparagraph may be public or private. However, the Member States shall be responsible for them in either case.


2.   The Member States shall notify the Commission of:






(a)


the name and postal and e-mail address of the coordinating authority they have designated pursuant to paragraph 1(a);










(b)


the name and postal and e-mail address of the inspection bodies they have designated pursuant to paragraph 1(b); and










(c)


the exact description of the respective spheres of activity of the inspection bodies they have designated.






3.   The coordinating authority may be the inspection body or one of the inspection bodies or any other body designated pursuant to paragraph 1.


4.   The Commission shall make publicly available the list of coordinating authorities designated by the Member States in the manner it considers appropriate.



Article 10

Trader database


1.   Member States shall set up a database on traders in fruit and vegetables, which shall list, under the conditions established in this Article, traders involved in the marketing of fruit and vegetables for which standards have been laid down pursuant to Article 113 of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.
For this purpose, Member States may use any other database or databases already established for other purposes.


2.   For the purpose of this Regulation, ‘trader’ means any natural or legal person who:






(a)


holds fruit and vegetables subject to marketing standards with a view to:






(i)


displaying or offering them for sale,










(ii)


selling them, or










(iii)


marketing them in any other manner, or














(b)


actually carries out any of the activities referred to in point (a) as regards fruit and vegetables subject to marketing standards.




The activities referred to in point (a) of the first subparagraph shall cover:






(a)


distance selling whether by internet or otherwise,










(b)


such activities carried out by the natural or legal person for itself or on behalf of a third party, and










(c)


such activities carried out in the Union and/or by export to third countries and/or import from third countries.






3.   Member States shall determine the conditions under which the following traders are to be included or not in the database:






(a)


traders whose activities are exempt from the obligation to comply with the marketing standards pursuant to Article 4; and










(b)


natural or legal persons whose activities in the fruit and vegetables sector are limited either to the transport of goods, or to the sale at the retail stage.






4.   Where the trader database is composed of several distinct elements, the coordinating authority shall ensure that the database, its elements and their updating are uniform. The updating of the database shall be done in particular using the information collected during conformity checks.


5.   The database shall contain for each trader:






(a)


the registration number, name and address;










(b)


information needed for its classification in one of the risk categories mentioned in Article 11(2), in particular, position in the marketing chain and information concerning the importance of the firm;










(c)


information concerning findings made during previous checks of each trader;










(d)


any other information considered necessary for checks such as information concerning the existence of a quality assurance system or self-check system related to the conformity to the marketing standards.




The updating of the database shall be carried out in particular using the information collected during conformity checks.


6.   Traders shall provide the information that Member States consider necessary to set up and update the database. Member States shall determine the conditions under which traders not established in their territory but trading on it shall be listed in their database.





Section 2




Conformity checks carried out by the Member States




Article 11

Conformity checks


1.   Member States shall ensure that conformity checks are carried out selectively, based on a risk analysis, and with appropriate frequency, so as to ensure compliance with the marketing standards and other provisions of this Title and of Articles 113 and 113a of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.
The criteria to assess the risk shall include the existence of a conformity certificate referred to in Article 14 issued by a competent authority of a third country where the conformity checks have been approved pursuant to Article 15. The existence of such certificate shall be considered as a factor reducing the risk of non-conformity.
The criteria to assess the risk may also include:






(a)


the nature of the product, the period of production, the price of the product, the weather, the packing and handling operations, the storage conditions, the country of origin, the means of transport or the volume of the lot;










(b)


the size of the traders, their position in the marketing chain, the volume or value marketed by them, their product range, the delivery area or the type of business carried out such as storage, sorting, packing or sale;










(c)


findings made during previous checks including the number and type of defects found, the usual quality of products marketed, the level of technical equipment used;










(d)


the reliability of traders’ quality assurance systems or self-checking systems related to the conformity to marketing standards;










(e)


the place where the check is carried out, in particular if it is the point of first entry into the Union, or the place where the products are being packed or loaded;










(f)


any other information that might indicate a risk of non-compliance.






2.   The risk analysis shall be based on the information contained in the trader database referred to in Article 10 and shall classify traders in risk categories.
Member States shall lay down in advance:






(a)


the criteria for assessing the risk of non-conformity of lots;










(b)


on the basis of a risk analysis for each risk category, the minimum proportions of traders or lots and/or quantities which will be subject to a conformity check.




Member States may choose not to carry out selective checks on products not subject to specific marketing standards, based on a risk analysis.


3.   Where checks reveal significant irregularities, Member States shall increase the frequency of checks in relation to traders, products, origins, or other parameters.


4.   Traders shall provide inspection bodies with all the information those bodies judge necessary for organising and carrying out conformity checks.



Article 12

Approved traders


1.   Member States may authorise traders classified in the lowest risk category and providing special guarantees on conformity to marketing standards to use the specimen in Annex II in the labelling of each package at the stage of dispatch and/or to sign the conformity certificate as referred to in Article 14.


2.   The authorisation shall be granted for a period of at least one year.


3.   Traders benefiting from this possibility shall:






(a)


have inspection staff who have received training approved by the Member States;










(b)


have suitable equipment for preparing and packing produce;










(c)


commit themselves to carry out a conformity check on the goods they dispatch and have a register recording all checks carried out.






4.   Where an authorised trader no longer complies with the requirements for authorisation the Member State shall withdraw the authorisation.


5.   Notwithstanding paragraph 1, authorised traders may continue to use specimens which conformed to Regulation (EC) No 1580/2007 on 30 June 2009 until stocks are exhausted.
Authorisations granted to traders before 1 July 2009 shall continue to apply for the period for which they were granted.



Article 13

Acceptance of declarations by customs


1.   Customs may only accept export declarations and/or declarations for the release for free circulation for the products subject to specific marketing standards if:






(a)


the goods are accompanied by a conformity certificate, or










(b)


the competent inspection body has informed the customs authority that the lots concerned have been issued a conformity certificate, or










(c)


the competent inspection body has informed the customs authority that it has not issued a conformity certificate for the lots concerned because they do not needed to be checked in the light of the risk assessment referred to in Article 11(1).




This shall be without prejudice to any conformity checks the Member State may carry out pursuant to Article 11.


2.   Paragraph 1 shall also apply to products subject to the general marketing standard set out in Part A of Annex I and products referred to in Article 4(1)(a) if the Member State concerned considers it necessary in the light of the risk analysis referred to in Article 11(1).



Article 14

Certificate of conformity


1.   Certificates of conformity may be issued by a competent authority to confirm that the products concerned conform to the relevant marketing standard (hereinafter referred to as ‘certificate’). The certificate for use by competent authorities in the Union is set out in Annex III.
Instead of certificates issued by competent authorities in the Union, the third countries referred to in Article 15(4) may use their own certificates provided that they contain at least equivalent information to the Union certificate. The Commission shall make available, by the means it considers appropriate, specimens of such third country certificates.


2.   The certificates may be issued either in paper format with original signature or in verified electronic format with electronic signature.


3.   Each certificate shall be stamped by the competent authority and signed by the person or persons empowered to do so.


4.   The certificate shall be issued in at least one of the official languages of the Union.


5.   Each certificate shall bear a serial number, by which it can be identified. A copy of each issued certificate shall be retained by the competent authority.


6.   Notwithstanding the first subparagraph of paragraph 1, Member States may continue to use certificates which conformed to Regulation (EC) No 1580/2007 on 30 June 2009 until stocks are exhausted.





Section 3




Conformity checks carried out by third countries




Article 15

Approval of conformity checks carried out by third countries prior to import into the Union


1.   At the request of a third country, the Commission may, in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 195(2) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, approve checks on conformity to specific marketing standards carried out by that third country prior to import into the Union


2.   The approval referred to in paragraph 1 may be granted to third countries where the Union marketing standards, or at least equivalent standards, are met for products exported to the Union.
The approval shall specify the official authority in the third country under the responsibility of which checks referred to in paragraph 1 are carried out. That authority shall be responsible for contacts with the Union. The approval shall also specify the third country inspection bodies in charge of the proper checks.
The approval may only apply to products originating in the third country concerned and may be limited to certain products.


3.   The third country inspection bodies shall be official bodies or bodies officially recognised by the authority referred to in paragraph 2 which provide satisfactory guarantees and dispose of the necessary personnel, equipment and facilities to carry out checks according to the methods referred to in Article 17(1) or equivalent methods.


4.   The third countries where the conformity checks have been approved under this Article, and the products concerned, shall be set out in Annex IV.
The Commission shall make available, by the means it considers appropriate, details of the official authorities and inspection bodies concerned.



Article 16

Suspension of approval of the conformity checks

The Commission may suspend approval of the conformity checks if it is found that, in a significant number of lots and/or quantities, the goods do not correspond to the information in the certificates of conformity issued by the third country inspection bodies.




Section 4




Methods of inspection




Article 17

Methods of inspection


1.   The conformity checks provided for in this Chapter, with the exception of those at the point of retail sale to the end consumer, shall be carried out in accordance with the methods of inspection laid down in Annex V, save as otherwise provided in this Regulation.
Member States shall lay down specific arrangements for checking conformity at the point of retail sale to the end consumer.


2.   Where inspectors find that the goods conform with the marketing standards, the inspection body may issue a certificate of conformity as set out in Annex III.


3.   Where the goods do not conform with the standards, the inspection body shall issue a finding of non-conformity for the attention of the trader or their representatives. Goods for which a finding of non-conformity has been issued may not be moved without the authorisation of the inspection body which issued that finding. That authorisation can be subject to the respect of conditions laid down by the inspection body.
Traders may decide to bring all or some of the goods into conformity. Goods brought into conformity may not be marketed before the competent inspection body has ensured by all appropriate means that the goods have actually been brought into conformity. The competent inspection body shall issue, where applicable, a certificate of conformity as set out in Annex III for the lot or part thereof only after the goods have been brought into conformity.
If an inspection body accepts a trader’s wish to bring the goods into conformity in a Member State other than that where the check leading to a finding of non-conformity has been carried out, the trader shall notify the competent inspection body of the destination Member State of the non-conforming lot. The Member State issuing the finding of non-conformity shall send a copy of that finding to the other Member States concerned including the Member State of destination of the non-conforming lot.
Where the goods can neither be brought into conformity nor sent to animal feed, industrial processing or any other non-food use, the inspection body may, if necessary, request traders to take adequate measures in order to ensure that the products concerned are not marketed.
Traders shall supply all information deemed necessary by Member States for the application of this paragraph.





Section 5




Notifications




Article 18

Notifications


1.   A Member State where a consignment from another Member State is found not to conform with the marketing standards because of defects or deterioration which could have been detected at the time of packaging shall notify forthwith the Commission and the Member States likely to be concerned.


2.   A Member State where a lot of goods from a third country has been rejected from release into free circulation because of non-compliance with the marketing standards shall notify forthwith the Commission, the Member States likely to be concerned and the third country concerned and listed in Annex IV.


3.   Member States shall notify the Commission of their provisions of inspection and risk analysis systems. They shall inform the Commission of any subsequent amendments to those systems.


4.   Member States shall notify the Commission and the other Member States of the summarised results of the inspections at all marketing stages in a given year by 30 June of the following year.


5.   The notifications referred to in paragraphs 1 to 4 shall be made by the means specified by the Commission.






TITLE III


PRODUCER ORGANISATIONS




CHAPTER I




Requirements and recognition





Section 1




Definitions




Article 19

Definitions


1.   For the purposes of this Title:






(a)


‘producer’ means a farmer as referred to in Article 2(2)(a) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007;










(b)


‘producer member’ means a producer or a cooperative of producers, who is a member of a producer organisation or association of producer organisations.










(c)


‘subsidiary’ means a company in which one or more producer organisations or associations thereof have taken shares and which contributes to the objectives of the producer organisation or the association of producer organisations;










(d)


‘transnational producer organisation’ means any organisation in which at least one of the producers’ holdings is located in a Member State other than where the organisation has its head office;










(e)


‘transnational association of producer organisations’ means any association of producer organisations in which at least one of the associated organisations is located in a Member State other than where the association has its head office;










(f)


‘Convergence Objective’ means the objective of the action for the least developed Member States and regions according to the Union legislation governing the European Regional Development Fund, the European Social Fund and the Cohesion Fund for the period from 1 January 2007 to 31 December 2013;










(g)


‘measure’ means one of the following:






(i)


actions aimed at planning of production, including acquisition of fixed assets;










(ii)


actions aimed at improving or maintaining product quality, including acquisition of fixed assets;










(iii)


actions aimed at improving marketing, including acquisition of fixed assets, as well as promotion and communication activities, other than promotion and communication activities falling under point (vi);










(iv)


research and experimental production, including acquisition of fixed assets;










(v)


training actions, other than training falling under point (vi), and actions aimed at promoting access to advisory services;










(vi)


any of the six crisis prevention and management instruments listed in points (a) to (f) of the first subparagraph of Article 103c(2) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007;










(vii)


environmental actions as referred to in Article 103c(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, including acquisition of fixed assets;










(viii)


other actions, including acquisition of fixed assets other than those falling under points (i) to (iv) and (vii) which fulfil one or more of the objectives referred to in Article 103c(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007;














(h)


‘action’ means a specific activity or instrument aimed at achieving a particular operational objective contributing to one or more of the objectives referred to in Article 103c(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007;










(i)


‘by-product’ means a product which results from preparation of a fruit or vegetable product which has a positive economic value but is not the main intended result;










(j)


‘preparation’ means preparatory activities such as cleaning, cutting, peeling trimming and drying of fruit and vegetables, without transforming them into processed fruit and vegetables;










(k)


‘interbranch basis’ as referred to in Article 103d(3)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 means one or more of the activities listed in Article 123(3)(c) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 approved by the Member State and managed jointly by a producer organisation or an association of producer organisations and at least one other actor in the food processing and/or distribution chain;










(l)


‘baseline indicator’ means any indicator reflecting a state or trend existing at the start of a programming period which may provide information useful:






(i)


in the analysis of the initial situation, in order to establish a national strategy for sustainable operational programmes or an operational programme;










(ii)


as a reference against which the results and impact of a national strategy or an operational programme may be assessed; and/or










(iii)


in interpreting the results and impact of a national strategy or an operational programme.










2.   Member States shall define the legal entities concerned in their territory which have to comply with Article 125b of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 in the light of their national legal and administrative structures. They may adopt complementary rules on the recognition of producer organisations and shall, where appropriate, also lay down provisions on clearly defined parts of legal entities for the application of Article 125b of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.





Section 2




Requirements applicable to producer organisations




Article 20

Product coverage


1.   Member States shall recognise producer organisations under Article 125b of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 in respect of the product or the group of products specified in the application for recognition, subject to any decision taken under Article 125b(1)(c) of that Regulation.


2.   Member States shall only recognise producer organisations in respect of the product or the group of products solely intended for processing where the producer organisations are able to ensure that such products are delivered for processing, whether through a system of supply contracts or otherwise.



Article 21

Minimum number of members

When laying down the minimum number of members of a producer organisation pursuant to Article 125b(1)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, Member States may provide that where an applicant for recognition is wholly or partly made up of members which are themselves legal entities or clearly defined parts of legal entities made up of producers, the minimum number of producers may be calculated on the basis of the number of producers associated with each of the legal entities or clearly defined parts of legal entities.


Article 22

Minimum length of membership


1.   The minimum membership period of a producer shall not be less than one year.


2.   Resignation from membership shall be notified to the organisation in writing. The Member States shall lay down the notice periods, which shall not exceed six months, and the dates on which resignation shall take effect.



Article 23

Structures and activities of producer organisations

Member States shall ensure that producer organisations have at their disposal the staff, infrastructure and equipment necessary to fulfil the requirements laid down in point (c) of the first paragraph of Article 122 and Article 125b(1)(e) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 and ensure their essential functioning, in particular as regards:






(a)


the knowledge of their members’ production;










(b)


collecting, sorting, storing and packaging the production of their members;










(c)


commercial and budgetary management; and










(d)


centralised book keeping and a system of invoicing.






Article 24

Value or volume of marketable production


1.   For the purposes of Article 125b(1)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, the value or volume of marketable production shall be calculated on the same basis as the value of marketed production set out in Articles 50 and 51 of this Regulation.


2.   Where one or more members of a producer organisation have insufficient historical data on marketed production for the application of paragraph 1, the value of their marketable production may be calculated as the average value of their marketable production during a period of three years preceding the year in which the application for recognition is submitted and in which the members of the concerned producer organisation were actually producing.



Article 25

Provision of technical means

For the purposes of Article 125b(1)(e) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, a producer organisation which is recognised for a product for which the provision of technical means is necessary shall be considered to fulfil its obligation where it provides an adequate level of technical means itself or through its members, or through subsidiaries, or by outsourcing.


Article 26

Producer organisations’ main activities


1.   The main activity of a producer organisation shall relate to the concentration of supply and the placing on the market of the products of its members for which it is recognised.


2.   A producer organisation may sell products from producers that are not a member of a producer organisation nor of an association of producer organisations, where it is recognised for those products and provided that the economic value of that activity is below the value of its marketed production calculated in accordance with Article 50.


3.   The marketing of fruit and vegetables that are bought directly from another producer organisation and of products for which the producer organisation is not recognised shall not be considered as forming part of the producer organisation’s activities.


4.   Where Article 50(9) applies, paragraph 3 of this Article shall apply mutatis mutandis to the subsidiaries concerned from 1 January 2012.



Article 27

Outsourcing


1.   The activities that a Member State may permit to be outsourced, in accordance with Article 125d of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 may include, among others, collecting, storing, packaging and marketing the produce of the members of the producer organisation.


2.   Outsourcing of an activity of a producer organisation shall mean that the producer organisation enters into a commercial arrangement with another entity, including one or several of its members or a subsidiary for the provision of the activity concerned. The producer organisation shall nevertheless remain responsible for ensuring the carrying out of that activity, and overall management control and supervision of commercial arrangement for the provision of the activity.



Article 28

Transnational producer organisations


1.   A transnational producer organisation’s head office shall be established in the Member State where the organisation has significant holdings or a significant number of members and/or achieves an important level of marketed production.


2.   The Member State in which the head office of the transnational producer organisation is located shall be responsible for the following:






(a)


recognising the transnational producer organisation;










(b)


approving the transnational producer organisation’s operational programme;










(c)


establishing the necessary administrative collaboration with the other Member States in which the members are located with respect to compliance with the terms of recognition and the system of checks and sanctions. Those other Member States shall be obliged to give all necessary assistance to the Member State in which the head office is located within a reasonable period of time; and










(d)


providing, on request of other Member States, all relevant documentation, including any applicable legislation available to the other Member States in which the members are located, translated into an official language of the requesting Member States.







Article 29

Mergers of producer organisations


1.   Where producer organisations have merged, the producer organisation resulting from the merger shall replace the merging producer organisations. The new entity shall assume the rights and obligations of the merging producer organisations.
The newly merged entity may operate the programmes in parallel and separately until 1 January of the year following the merger or merge the operational programmes from the moment of the merger. The operational programmes shall be merged in accordance with Articles 66 and 67.


2.   By way of derogation from the second subparagraph of paragraph 1, Member States may authorise producer organisations which so request, for duly substantiated reasons, to continue implementing separate operational programmes in parallel until they reach their natural conclusion.



Article 30

Non-producer members


1.   Member States may determine whether and on what conditions any natural or legal person who is not a producer may be accepted as a member of a producer organisation.


2.   When setting the conditions referred to in paragraph 1, the Member States shall ensure, in particular, compliance with point (a)(iii) of the first paragraph of Article 122 and Article 125a(3)(c) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.


3.   The natural or legal persons referred to in paragraph 1 shall not:






(a)


be taken into account for the recognition criteria;










(b)


benefit directly from the measures financed by the Union.




Member States may restrict or prohibit the natural or legal persons’ right to vote on decisions relating to operational funds, in line with the conditions laid down in paragraph 2.



Article 31

Democratic accountability of producer organisations


1.   Member States shall take all measures they consider to be necessary in order to avoid any abuse of power or influence by one or more members over the management and operation of a producer organisation, which shall include voting rights.


2.   Where a producer organisation is a clearly defined part of a legal entity, Member States may adopt measures to restrict or prohibit the powers of that legal entity to modify, approve or reject decisions of the producer organisation.





Section 3




Associations of producer organisations




Article 32

Rules on producer organisations applicable to associations of producer organisations

Articles 22, 26(3), 27 and 31 shall apply mutatis mutandis to associations of producer organisations. Where the association of producer organisations carries out the selling activity, Article 26(2) shall apply mutatis mutandis.


Article 33

Recognition of associations of producer organisations


1.   Member States may only recognise associations of producer organisations under Article 125c of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 in respect of the activity or activities concerning the product or the group of products specified in the application for recognition.


2.   An association of producer organisations may be recognised under Article 125c of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 and carry out any of the activities of a producer organisation, even when the marketing of the products concerned continues to be carried out by its members.



Article 34

Members of associations of producer organisations which are not producer organisations


1.   Member States may determine whether and on what conditions any natural or legal person who is not a recognised producer organisation may be accepted as a member of an association of producer organisations.


2.   Members of a recognised association of producer organisations who are not recognised producer organisations shall not:






(a)


be considered for the recognition criteria;










(b)


benefit directly from the measures financed by the Union.




Member States may permit, restrict or prohibit those members’ right to vote on decisions relating to operational programmes.



Article 35

Transnational association of producer organisations


1.   The head office of the transnational association of producer organisations shall be established in a Member State in which this association has a significant number of member organisations and/or the member organisations achieve an important level of marketed production.


2.   The Member State in which the head office of the transnational association of producer organisations is located shall be responsible for the following:






(a)


recognising the association;










(b)


approving, where necessary, the association’s operational programme;










(c)


establishing the necessary administrative collaboration with the other Member States in which the associated organisations are located with respect to compliance with the terms of recognition and the system of checks and sanctions. Those other Member States shall be obliged to give all necessary assistance to the Member State in which the head office is located; and










(d)


providing, on request of other Member States, all relevant documentation, including any applicable legislation available to the other Member States in which the members are located, translated into an official language of the requesting Member States.









Section 4




Producer groups




Article 36

Submission of recognition plans


1.   A legal entity or clearly defined part of a legal entity shall submit the recognition plan referred to in Article 125e(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 to the competent authority of the Member State in which the entity has its head office.


2.   Member States shall lay down:






(a)


the minimum criteria which the legal entity or clearly defined part of a legal entity shall meet to be able to submit a recognition plan;










(b)


the rules for the drafting, content and implementation of recognition plans;










(c)


the period during which a former member of a producer organisation shall be prohibited from joining a producer group after leaving the producer organisation in respect of the products for which the producer organisation was recognised; and










(d)


the administrative procedures for the approval, monitoring and fulfilling of recognition plans.







Article 37

Content of recognition plans

A draft recognition plan shall cover at least the following:






(a)


a description of the initial situation, in particular as regards the number of producer members, giving full details of members, production, including the value of marketed production, marketing and infrastructure that is at the producer group’s disposal, including infrastructure owned by individual members of the producer group;










(b)


the proposed date for starting implementation of the plan and its duration, which shall not exceed five years; and










(c)


activities and investments to be implemented in order to achieve recognition.






Article 38

Approval of recognition plans


1.   The competent authority of the Member State shall decide on a draft recognition plan within three months of the receipt of the plan accompanied by all supporting documents. Member States may provide for a shorter deadline.


2.   Member States may adopt additional rules concerning the eligibility of operations and expenditure under recognition plans, including rules on the eligibility of investments, for the purpose of achieving compliance by producer groups with the recognition criteria for producer organisations referred to in Article 125b(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.


3.   Following the conformity checks referred to in Article 111, the competent authority of the Member State shall, as appropriate:






(a)


accept the plan and grant preliminary recognition;










(b)


request changes to the plan;










(c)


reject the plan.




Acceptance may be granted, where necessary, only if the changes requested under point (b) have been incorporated in the plan.
The competent authority of the Member State shall notify the legal entity or clearly defined part of a legal entity of its decision.



Article 39

Implementation of recognition plans


1.   The recognition plan shall be implemented in annual segments starting on 1 January. Member States may allow producer groups to break down these annual segments into semestrial segments.
For the first year of implementation in accordance with the proposed date referred to in Article 37(b), the recognition plan shall begin:






(a)


on 1 January following the date of its acceptance by the competent authority of the Member State; or










(b)


on the first calendar day following the date of its acceptance.




The first year of implementation of the recognition plan shall in any event end on 31 December of the same year.


2.   Member States shall set the conditions under which producer groups may request changes to plans during their implementation. Those requests shall be accompanied by all the necessary supporting documents.
Member States shall determine the conditions under which recognition plans may be amended during an annual or semestrial segment without prior approval by the competent authority of the Member State. Those changes shall only be eligible for aid if they are communicated by the producer group to the competent authority of the Member State without delay.


3.   The competent authority of the Member State shall decide on changes to plans within three months of receipt of the request for change, after considering the evidence supplied. Where no decision is taken on a request for change within that period, the request shall be deemed to have been rejected. Member States may provide for a shorter deadline.



Article 40

Applications for recognition as a producer organisation


1.   Producer groups implementing a recognition plan may, at any time, submit an application for recognition under Article 125b of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007. Such applications shall in any event be submitted before the end of the transitional period referred to in Article 125e(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.


2.   From the date on which such an application is lodged, the group in question may submit a draft operational programme under Article 63.



Article 41

Producer groups’ main activities


1.   The main activity of a producer group shall relate to the concentration of supply and the placing on the market of the products of its members for which it is preliminary recognised.


2.   A producer group may sell products from producers which are not a member of a producer group, where it is recognised for those products and provided that the economic value of that activity is below the value of the marketed production of the producer group’s own members and of members of other producer groups.



Article 42

Value of marketed production


1.   Article 50(1) to (4) and (7) and the first sentence of paragraph 6 of that Article shall apply mutatis mutandis to producer groups.


2.   Where a reduction of the value of marketed production of at least 35 % has occurred due to reasons, duly justified to the Member State, falling outside the responsibility and control of the producer group, the total value of marketed production shall be deemed to represent 65 % of the total value declared in the previous application or applications for aid covering the most recent annual segment, as verified by the Member State, and in the absence thereof, of the value declared initially in the approved recognition plan.


3.   The value of marketed production shall be as calculated under the legislation applicable as regards the period for which the aid is claimed.



Article 43

Financing of recognition plans


1.   The rates of aid referred to in Article 103a(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall be reduced by half in relation to marketed production which exceeds EUR 1 000 000.


2.   The aid referred to in Article 103a(1)(a) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall be subject to an annual ceiling for each producer group of EUR 100 000.


3.   The aid referred to in Article 103a(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall be paid:






(a)


in annual or semestrial instalments at the end of each annual or semestrial period for the implementation of the recognition plan; or










(b)


in instalments covering part of an annual period if the plan starts during the annual period or if recognition occurs under Article 125b of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 before the end of an annual period. In that case, the ceiling referred to in paragraph 2 of this Article shall be reduced proportionately.




In order to calculate the instalments, the Member States may use as a basis the marketed production corresponding to a period other than that in respect of which the instalment is paid, where checks so require. The difference between the periods shall be less than the actual period concerned.


4.   The exchange rate applicable to the amounts referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 shall be the rate most recently published by the European Central Bank prior to the first day of the period for which the aid in question is granted.



Article 44

Aid for investments required for recognition

Investments linked to the implementation of recognition plans referred to in Article 37(c) of this Regulation for which aid is provided for under Article 103a(1)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall be financed pro rata to their use for the products of the members of a producer group for which preliminary recognition is granted.
Investments likely to distort competition in respect of the other economic activities of the producer group shall be excluded from Union aid.


Article 45

Application for aid


1.   A producer group shall submit a single application for the aid referred to in Article 103a(1)(a) and (b) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 within three months of the end of each annual or semestrial period as referred to in Article 43(3) of this Regulation. The application shall include a declaration of the value of marketed production for the period for which the aid is claimed.


2.   Applications for aid covering semestrial periods may be submitted only if the recognition plan is broken into semestrial periods as referred to in Article 39(1). All applications for aid shall be accompanied by a written declaration from the producer group to the effect that the latter:






(a)


complies and will comply with Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 and with this Regulation; and










(b)


has not benefited, is not benefiting and will not benefit either directly or indirectly from duplicate Union or national financing for actions implemented under its recognition plan for which Union financing is granted pursuant to this Regulation.






3.   Member States shall fix the deadline for paying the aid which in any case shall not be later than six months after the receipt of the application.



Article 46

Eligibility

Member States shall evaluate the eligibility of producer groups for the aid under this Regulation in order to establish that the aid is duly justified, taking into account the conditions and the date on which any earlier public aid was granted to the producer organisations or groups from which the members of the producer group in question originate and to any movements of members between producer organisations and producer groups.


Article 47

Union contribution


1.   The Union contribution towards aid as referred to in Article 103a(1)(a) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall amount to:






(a)


75 % in the regions eligible under the Convergence Objective; and










(b)


50 % in other regions.




The remainder of the aid shall be paid as a flat-rate payment by the Member State. The aid application shall not be required to include evidence as to the use of the aid.


2.   The Union contribution towards aid as referred to in Article 103a(1)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, expressed in terms of a capital grant or capital-grant equivalent, shall not exceed, as a percentage of eligible investment costs:






(a)


50 % in the regions eligible under the Convergence Objective; and










(b)


30 % in other regions.




The Member States concerned shall undertake to contribute at least 5 % of eligible investment costs.
Beneficiaries of aid towards eligible investment costs shall pay at least:






(a)


25 % in the regions eligible under the Convergence Objective; and










(b)


45 % in other regions.







Article 48

Mergers


1.   Aid as provided for in Article 103a(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 may be given, or may continue to be given, to producer groups which have been granted preliminary recognition and which result from the merger between two or more producer group granted preliminary recognition.


2.   For the purposes of calculating the aid payable pursuant to paragraph 1, the producer group resulting from the merger shall replace the merging groups.


3.   Where two or more producer groups merge, the new entity shall assume the rights and obligations of the producer group which has been granted preliminary recognition the earliest.


4.   Where a producer group which has been granted preliminary recognition merges with a recognised producer organisation, the resulting entity shall no longer be eligible for preliminary recognition as a producer group, nor for the aid referred to in Article 103a(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007. The resulting entity shall continue to be treated as the recognised producer organisation, provided that it respects the applicable requirements. If necessary, the producer organisation shall request a change to its operational programme, and to this end Article 29 shall apply mutatis mutandis.
However, actions carried out by producer groups before such a merger shall continue to be eligible under the conditions set out in the recognition plan.



Article 49

Consequences of recognition


1.   Aid as provided for in Article 103a(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall cease once recognition is granted.


2.   Where an operational programme is submitted pursuant to this Regulation, the Member State concerned shall ensure that there is no duplicated financing of the measures set out in the recognition plan.


3.   Investments qualifying for the aid or the costs referred to in Article 103a(1)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 may be carried over to operational programmes provided they are in line with the requirements of this Regulation.


4.   Member States shall fix the period, starting after implementation of the recognition plan, within which the producer group shall be required to be recognised as a producer organisation. The period shall not exceed four months.






CHAPTER II




Operational funds and operational programmes





Section 1




Value of marketed production




Article 50

Basis for calculation


1.   The value of marketed production for a producer organisation shall be calculated on the basis of the production of the producer organisation itself and its producer members, and shall only include the production of those fruits and vegetables for which the producer organisation is recognised. The value of marketed production may include fruit and vegetables that are not required to conform to the marketing standards, where those standards do not apply pursuant to Article 4.


2.   The value of marketed production shall include the production of members who leave or join the producer organisation. The Member States shall determine the conditions to avoid duplicate counting.


3.   The value of the marketed production shall not include the value of processed fruit and vegetables or any other product that is not a product of the fruit and vegetables sector.
However, the value of the marketed production of fruit and vegetables intended for processing, which have been transformed into one of the processed fruit and vegetable products listed in Part X of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 or any other processed product referred to in this Article and described further in Annex VI to this Regulation, by either a producer organisation, an association of producer organisations or their producer members or subsidiaries as referred to in paragraph 9 of this Article, either by themselves or through outsourcing, shall be calculated as a flat rate in percentage applied to the invoiced value of those processed products. That flat rate shall be:






(a)


53 % for fruit juices;










(b)


73 % for concentrated juices;










(c)


77 % for tomato concentrate;










(d)


62 % for frozen fruit and vegetables;










(e)


48 % for canned fruit and vegetables;










(f)


70 % for canned mushrooms of the genus Agaricus;










(g)


81 % for fruits provisionally preserved in brine;










(h)


81 % for dried fruits;










(i)


27 % for other processed fruit and vegetables;










(j)


12 % for processed aromatic herbs;










(k)


41 % for paprika powder.






4.   Member States may allow producer organisations to include the value of the by-products in the value of marketed production.


5.   The value of marketed production shall include the value of market withdrawals disposed of as provided for in Article 103d(4) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, estimated at the average price of those products marketed by the producer organisation in the previous reference period.


6.   Only the production of the producer organisation and/or its producer members which is marketed by that producer organisation shall be counted in the value of marketed production. The production of the producer members of the producer organisation marketed by another producer organisation designated by their own organisation, pursuant to Article 125a(2)(b) and (c) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall be counted in the value of marketed production of the second producer organisation.


7.   The marketed production of fruit and vegetables shall be invoiced at the ‘ex-producer organisation’ stage where applicable, as product listed in Part IX of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 which is prepared and packaged, excluding:






(a)


VAT;










(b)


internal transport costs, where the distance between the centralised collection or packing points of the producer organisation and the point of distribution of the producer organisation is significant. Member States shall provide for reductions to be applied to the invoiced value for products invoiced at different stages of delivery or transport and shall duly justify in their national strategy what distance shall be considered as significant.






8.   The value of marketed production may also be calculated at the ‘ex-association of producer organisation’ stage and on the same basis as set out in paragraph 7.


9.   The value of marketed production may also be calculated at the ‘ex-subsidiary’ stage, on the same basis as set out in paragraph 7, provided that at least 90 % of the capital of the subsidiary is owned:






(a)


by one or more producer organisations or associations of producer organisations; and/or










(b)


subject to Member State approval, by producer members of the producer organisations or associations of producer organisations, if doing so contributes to the objectives listed in point (c) of the first paragraph of Article 122 and Article 125b(1)(a) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.






10.   In case of outsourcing, the value of marketed production shall be calculated at the ‘ex-producer organisation’ stage and shall include the added economic value of the activity that has been outsourced by the producer organisation to its members, third parties or to another subsidiary than the one referred to in paragraph 9.


11.   Where a reduction in production occurs due to a climatic event or animal or plant diseases or pest infestations, any insurance indemnification received in respect of harvest insurance measures covered by Section 6 of Chapter III, or equivalent measures managed by the producer organisation, due to those causes may be included in the value of marketed production.



Article 51

Reference period


1.   The annual ceiling on aid referred to in Article 103d(2) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall be calculated each year on the basis of the value of marketed production during a 12-month reference period to be determined by the Member States.


2.   The reference period shall be fixed by the Member States for each producer organisation as:






(a)


a 12-month period, starting no earlier than 1 January three years preceding the year for which the aid is requested and ending no later than 31 December of the year preceding the year for which the aid is requested; or










(b)


the average value of three consecutive 12-month periods starting no earlier than 1 January five years preceding the year for which the aid is requested and ending no later than 31 December of the year preceding the year for which the aid is requested.






3.   The 12-month period shall be the accounting period of the producer organisation concerned.
The methodology for fixing the reference period shall not vary during an operational programme except in duly justified situations.


4.   Where a reduction of at least 35 % in the value of a product has occurred due to reasons falling outside the responsibility and control of the producer organisation, the value of marketed production of that product shall be deemed to represent 65 % of its value in the previous reference period.
The producer organisation shall justify the reasons referred to in the first subparagraph to the competent authority of the Member State concerned.


5.   Where recently recognised producer organisations have insufficient historical data on marketed production for the purpose of the application of paragraph 2, the value of marketed production may be considered to be the value of marketable production provided by the producer organisation for the purposes of recognition.
The first subparagraph shall apply mutatis mutandis to new members of a producer organisation who join a producer organisation for the first time.


6.   Member States shall take the measures necessary to gather information on the value of marketed production of producer organisations which have not submitted operational programmes.


7.   By way of derogation from paragraphs 1 and 6, the value of marketed production for the reference period shall be as calculated under the legislation applicable in that reference period.
However, for operational programmes approved by 20 January 2010, the value of the marketed production for the years until 2007 shall be calculated on the basis of the legislation applicable in the reference period, whereas the value of the marketed production for the years from 2008 shall be calculated on the basis of the legislation applicable in 2008.
For operational programmes approved after 20 January 2010, the value of the marketed production for the years from 2008 shall be calculated on the basis of the legislation applicable at the time the operational programme has been approved.





Section 2




Operational Funds




Article 52

Management

Member States shall ensure that operational funds are managed in such a way that it is possible for external auditors to annually identify, check and certify their expenditure and revenue.


Article 53

Financing of operational funds


1.   The financial contributions to the operational fund referred to in Article 103b(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall be determined by the producer organisation.


2.   All producers shall have the opportunity to benefit from the operational fund, and all producers shall have the opportunity to participate democratically in decisions concerning the use of the operational fund of the producer organisation and of the financial contributions to the operational fund.



Article 54

Notification of estimated amount


1.   Producer organisations shall notify their Member State of the estimated amounts of Union contribution, and the contribution of its members and of the producer organisation itself to the operational funds for the following year by 15 September at the latest, together with the operational programmes or requests for approval of their amendments.
Member States may set a later date than 15 September.


2.   Calculation of the estimated amount of operational funds shall be based on the operational programmes and the value of marketed production. The calculation shall be split between expenditure for crisis prevention and management measures and other measures.





Section 3




Operational Programmes




Article 55

National strategy


1.   The overall structure and content of the national strategy referred to in Article 103f(2) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall be established in accordance with the guidelines set out in Annex VII. It may be comprised of regional elements.
The national strategy shall integrate all the decisions taken and provisions adopted by the Member State in application of Sections I and Ia of Chapter II of Title II of Part II of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 and this Title.


2.   The national strategy, including the integration of the national framework referred to in Article 103f(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, shall be established before draft operational programmes are submitted in any given year. The national framework shall be integrated after having been submitted to the Commission and, if appropriate, after having been amended, in accordance with the second subparagraph of Article 103f(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.


3.   An analysis of the initial situation shall form part of the process of drawing up the national strategy and be carried out under responsibility of the Member State. It shall identify and assess the needs to be met, the ranking of the needs in terms of priorities, the goals to be achieved through the operational programmes to meet those priority needs, the results expected and the quantified targets to be attained in relation to the initial situation, and lay down the most appropriate instruments and actions for attaining those objectives.


4.   Member States shall also ensure monitoring and evaluation of the national strategy and its implementation through operational programmes.
The national strategy may be amended, in particular in the light of monitoring and evaluation. Such amendments shall be made before the submission of draft operational programmes in any given year.


5.   Member States shall set out in the national strategy maximum percentages of the fund which may be spent on any individual measure and/or type of action and/or expenditure in order to ensure an appropriate balance between different measures.



Article 56

National framework for environmental actions


1.   In addition to the submission of the proposed framework referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 103f(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, Member States shall also notify the Commission of any amendments to the national framework which shall be subject to the procedure set out in that subparagraph. The Commission shall make a national framework available to other Member States by the means it considers appropriate.


2.   The national framework shall indicate in a separate section the general requirements on complementarity, consistency and conformity that environmental actions selected under an operational programme shall fulfil, as referred to in the second sentence of the first subparagraph of Article 103f(1) of Regulation (EC) 1234/2007. The Commission shall provide the Member States with a model of that section.
The national framework shall also set out a non-exhaustive list of environmental actions and the conditions thereof applicable in the Member State for the purposes of Article 103c(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007. For each environmental action, the national framework shall indicate:






(a)


the justification of the action, on the basis of its environmental impact; and










(b)


the specific commitment or commitments entailed.






3.   Environmental actions which are similar to agri-environmental commitments supported under a rural development programme shall have the same duration as those commitments. They shall be continued in a subsequent operational programme, where the duration of similar agri-environmental commitments would exceed the duration of the initial operational programme. However, Member States may authorise shorter durations for environmental actions or even their discontinuance in duly justified cases, and in particular based upon the results of the mid-term evaluation referred to in Article 126(3) of this Regulation.
The national framework shall indicate the duration of the actions referred to in sub-paragraph 1 and, where appropriate, the obligation to continue the action in a subsequent operational programme.



Article 57

Complementary Member State rules

Member States may adopt rules complementing Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 and this Regulation concerning the eligibility of measures, actions or expenditure under operational programmes.


Article 58

Relationship with rural development programmes


1.   Subject to paragraph 2, no support under the Member State’s rural development programme or programmes approved under Council Regulation (EC) No 1698/2005 (9), shall be granted to actions which are covered by measures set out by this Regulation.


2.   Where in accordance with Article 5(6) of Regulation (EC) No 1698/2005 support has exceptionally been granted to measures which would be potentially eligible under this Regulation, Member States shall ensure that a beneficiary may receive support for a given action only under one scheme.
To that end, when Member States include measures containing such exceptions in their rural development programmes, they shall ensure that the national strategy as referred to in Article 55 of this Regulation indicates the criteria and administrative rules which they will apply in the rural development programmes.


3.   Where relevant, and without prejudice to the provisions of Articles 103a(3), 103d(1) and (3) and 103e of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 and Article 47 of this Regulation, the level of support for measures covered by this Regulation shall not exceed that applicable for the measures under the rural development programme.


4.   Support for environmental actions, other than acquisition of fixed assets, shall be limited to the maximum amounts laid down in the Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 1698/2005 for agri-environment payments. Those amounts may be increased in exceptional cases taking account of specific circumstances to be justified in the national strategy as referred to in Article 55 of this Regulation and in the operational programmes of the producer organisations. The amounts for environmental actions may also be increased in order to support operations related to the priorities identified in Article 16a of Regulation (EC) No 1698/2005.


5.   Paragraph 4 shall not apply to environmental actions which do not relate directly or indirectly to a particular parcel.



Article 59

Contents of operational programmes

Operational programmes shall include the following:






(a)


a description of the initial situation, based, where relevant, on the common baseline indicators listed in Annex VIII;










(b)


the objectives of the programme, taking into consideration the outlook for production and outlets, and an explanation of how the programme contributes to the national strategy and confirmation that it is consistent with the national strategy, including in its balance between activities. The description of the objectives shall refer to objectives defined in the national strategy and indicate measurable targets, so as to facilitate the monitoring of progress gradually made in implementing the programme;










(c)


a detailed description of the measures, including those for crisis prevention and management, containing separate actions, to be taken and the means for attaining those objectives in each year of implementation of the programme. The description shall indicate the extent to which the different measures proposed:






(i)


complement and are consistent with other measures, including measures financed or eligible for support by other Union funds, and in particular rural development support. In this respect, a specific reference shall also be made, if appropriate, to measures carried out under previous operational programmes;










(ii)


do not entail any risk of double financing by Union funds;














(d)


the duration of the programme; and










(e)


the financial aspects, namely:






(i)


the method of calculation and the level of financial contributions;










(ii)


the procedure for financing the operational fund;










(iii)


information necessary to justify different levels of contribution; and










(iv)


the budget and timetable for undertaking operations for each year of implementation of the programme.










Article 60

Eligibility of actions under operational programmes


1.   Operational programmes shall not include actions or expenditure referred to in the list set out in Annex IX.


2.   Expenditure under operational programmes eligible for aid shall be restricted to the actual costs incurred. However, Member States may instead fix standard flat rates in advance and in a duly justified way in the following cases:






(a)


where such standard flat rates are referred to in Annex IX;










(b)


for additional per-kilometre external transport costs, compared to road haulage costs, incurred when using rail and/or ship transport as part of a measure to respect the environment; and










(c)


for additional costs and income foregone resulting from environmental actions, calculated in conformity with Article 53(2) of Commission Regulation (EC) No 1974/2006 (10).




Member States shall review such rates at least every five years.


3.   In order for an action to be eligible, more than 50 % by value of the products concerned by it shall be those for which the producer organisation is recognised. To be counted in the 50 %, the products shall come from the producer organisation’s members or producer members of another producer organisation or association of producer organisations. Article 50 shall apply mutatis mutandis to the calculation of the value.


4.   The following rules shall apply to environmental actions:






(a)


various environmental actions may be combined provided that they are complementary and compatible. Where environmental actions are combined, the level of support shall take account of the specific income foregone and additional costs resulting from the combination;










(b)


commitments to limit the use of fertilisers, plant protection products or other inputs shall be accepted only if such limitations can be assessed in a way that provides reasonable assurance about compliance with those commitments;










(c)


actions related to the environmental management of packaging shall be properly justified and go beyond the requirements set out by the Member State in accordance with Directive 94/62/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (11).




Member States shall, in the national strategies referred to in Article 55 of this Regulation, set out a maximum percentage of the annual expenditure under an operational programme that may be spent on actions related to the environmental management of packaging. That percentage shall not be higher than 20 %, except in order to take account of specific national/regional circumstances to be justified in the national strategy.


5.   Investments, including those under leasing contracts, the repayment period of which exceeds the length of the operational programme may be carried over to a subsequent operational programme on duly justified economic grounds, and in particular in cases where the fiscal depreciation period is longer than five years.
Where investments are replaced, the residual value of the investments replaced shall be:






(a)


added to the operational fund of the producer organisation; or










(b)


subtracted from the cost of the replacement.






6.   Investments or actions may be implemented on individual holdings and/or premises of producer members of the producer organisation, or association of producer organisations including where the actions are outsourced to members of the producer organisation or association of producer organisations, provided that they contribute to the objectives of the operational programme. If the producer member leaves the producer organisation, Member States shall ensure that the investment or its residual value is recovered. However, in duly justified circumstances, Member States may provide that the producer organisation shall not be required to recover the investment or its residual value.


7.   Investments and actions related to the transformation of fruit and vegetables into processed fruit and vegetables may be eligible for support where such investments and actions pursue the objectives referred to in Article 103c(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, including those referred to in point (c) of the first paragraph of Article 122 of that Regulation, and provided that they are identified in the national strategy referred to in Article 103f(2) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.



Article 61

Documents to be submitted

Operational programmes shall in particular be accompanied by:






(a)


evidence of the setting-up of an operational fund;










(b)


a written undertaking from the producer organisation to comply with Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 and this Regulation; and










(c)


a written undertaking from the producer organisation that it has not received and will not receive, directly or indirectly, any other Union or national funding in respect of actions qualifying for aid under this Regulation.






Article 62

Operational programmes of associations of producer organisations


1.   A Member State may authorise an association of producer organisations to present an entire or a partial operational programme, which shall consist of actions identified, but not implemented by two or more member producer organisations in their operational programmes.


2.   The operational programmes of the associations of producer organisations shall be considered together with the operational programmes of the member producer organisations, including as regards the fulfilment of the objectives and limits established in Article 103c of Regulation (EC) 1234/2007.


3.   Member States shall ensure that:






(a)


the actions are fully financed from contributions of members of associations of producer organisations which are producer organisations, paid out of the operational funds of those producer organisations. However, the actions may be financed in a proportional amount to the contribution of member producer organisations, by producer members of associations of producer organisations which are not producer organisations pursuant to Article 34;










(b)


the actions and the corresponding financial participation are listed in the operational programme of each participating producer organisation;










(c)


there is no risk of duplicate aid.






4.   Articles 58, 59 and 60, Article 61(b) and (c) and Articles 63 to 67 shall apply mutatis mutandis to operational programmes of associations of producer organisations. However, a balance between the activities referred to in Article 59(b) shall not be required in respect of partial operational programmes of associations of producer organisations.



Article 63

Time limit for submission


1.   Operational programmes shall be submitted for approval by the producer organisation to the competent authority in the Member State in which the producer organisation has its headquarters by 15 September of the year preceding that in which they are to be implemented, at the latest. However, the Member States may postpone that date.


2.   When a legal entity or clearly defined part of a legal entity, including a producer group, submits an application for recognition as a producer organisation it may, at the same time, submit the operational programme referred to in paragraph 1 for approval. Approval of the operational programme shall be subject to obtainment of recognition no later than on the final date laid down in Article 64(2).



Article 64

Decision


1.   The competent authority of the Member State shall, as appropriate:






(a)


approve amounts of operational funds and operational programmes which meet the requirements of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 and those of this Chapter;










(b)


approve the operational programmes, on condition that certain amendments are accepted by the producer organisation; or










(c)


reject the operational programmes or parts thereof.






2.   The competent authority of the Member State shall take decisions on operational programmes and operational funds by 15 December of the year in which they are submitted.
Member States shall notify the producer organisations of those decisions by 15 December.
However, for duly justified reasons, the competent authority of the Member State may take a decision on operational programmes and operational funds by 20 January following the date of submission. The approval decision may stipulate that expenditure is eligible from 1 January of the year following the submission.



Article 65

Amendments to operational programmes for subsequent years


1.   Producer organisations may request amendments to operational programmes, including their duration, by 15 September at the latest, to be applied as from 1 January of the following year.
However, Member States may postpone the date for submitting requests.


2.   Requests for amendments shall be accompanied by supporting documents giving the reason, nature and implications of the changes.


3.   The competent authority of the Member State shall take decisions on requests for amendments to operational programmes by 15 December of the year of the request.
However, for duly justified reasons, the competent authority of the Member State may take a decision on amendments to operational programmes by 20 January following the year of the request. The approval decision may stipulate that expenditure is eligible from 1 January following the year of the request.



Article 66

Amendments to operational programmes during the year


1.   Member States may authorise amendments to operational programmes during the year, under conditions to be determined by them.


2.   The competent authority of the Member States shall take decisions on amendments to operational programmes requested under paragraph 1 by 20 January of the year following the year for which amendments have been requested.


3.   Producer organisations may be authorised by the competent authority of the Member State, during the year to:






(a)


implement their operational programmes in part only;










(b)


change the contents of the operational programme;










(c)


increase the amount of the operational fund by a maximum of 25 %, and decrease it by a percentage to be fixed by Member States, of the amount initially approved, provided that the overall objectives of the operational programme are maintained. Member States may increase this percentage in case of mergers of producer organisations as referred to in Article 29(1);










(d)


add national financial assistance to the operational fund in case of application of Article 93.






4.   Member States shall determine the conditions under which operational programmes may be amended during the year without prior approval by the competent authority of the Member State. Those amendments are only eligible for aid if they are notified by the producer organisation to the competent authority without delay.



Article 67

Format of operational programmes


1.   Operational programmes shall be implemented in annual periods running from 1 January to 31 December.


2.   Operational programmes approved on 15 December at the latest shall be implemented from 1 January of the following year.
The implementation of programmes approved after 15 December shall be postponed for one year.
By way of derogation from the first and second subparagraphs of this paragraph, where the third subparagraph of Article 64(2) or the second subparagraph of Article 65(3) apply, the implementation of operational programmes approved in accordance with those provisions shall start not later than 31 January following their approval.





Section 4




Aid




Article 68

Approved amount of aid


1.   Member States shall notify producer organisations and associations of producer organisations of the approved amount of aid, as required by Article 103g(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, by 15 December of the year preceding the year for which aid is requested.


2.   Where the third subparagraph of Article 64(2) or the second subparagraph of Article 65(3) apply, Member States shall give notification of the approved amount of aid by 20 January of the year for which aid is requested.



Article 69

Aid applications


1.   Producer organisations shall submit an application for aid or the balance thereof to the competent authority of the Member State for each operational programme for which aid is requested by 15 February of the year following the year for which the aid is requested.


2.   The aid applications shall be accompanied by supporting documents showing:






(a)


the aid requested;










(b)


the value of marketed production;










(c)


the financial contributions levied on its members and those of the producer organisation itself;










(d)


the expenditure incurred in respect of the operational programme;










(e)


the expenditure concerning crisis prevention and management broken down by actions;










(f)


the proportion of the operational fund spent on crisis prevention and management broken down by actions;










(g)


compliance with Article 103c(2), with the first subparagraph of Article 103c(3) and with Article 103d of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007;










(h)


a written undertaking that it has not received any duplicate Union or national funding in respect of measures and/or operations qualifying for aid under this Regulation; and










(i)


in the case of an application for payment based on a standard flat rate as referred to in Article 60(2), proof of the implementation of the action concerned.






3.   The aid applications may cover expenditure programmed but not incurred if the following elements are proved:






(a)


the operations concerned could not be carried out by 31 December of the year of implementation of the operational programme, for reasons beyond the control of the producer organisation concerned;










(b)


those operations can be carried out by 30 April of the year following the year for which the aid is requested; and










(c)


an equivalent contribution from the producer organisation remains in the operational fund.




The aid shall be paid and the security lodged in accordance with Article 71(3) shall be released only on condition that proof of implementation of the programmed expenditure referred to in point (b) of the first subparagraph is provided by 30 April of the year following that for which the expenditure in question was programmed, and on the basis of the entitlement to the aid actually established.


4.   Where applications are submitted after the date provided for in paragraph 1, the aid shall be reduced by 1 % for each day late.
In exceptional and duly justified cases, the competent authority of the Member State may accept applications after the date provided for in paragraph 1, if the necessary checks have been carried out and the time limit for payment provided for in Article 70 is complied with.


5.   Associations of producer organisations may submit an application for aid as referred to in paragraph 1 in the name and on behalf of their members, where those members are producer organisations and provided that the supporting documents requested under paragraph 2 are submitted for each member. The producer organisations shall be the final beneficiaries of the aid.



Article 70

Payment of the aid

Member States shall pay the aid by 15 October of the year following the year of implementation of the programme.


Article 71

Advance payments


1.   Member States may permit producer organisations to apply for the advance payment of the part of the aid corresponding to the foreseeable expenditure resulting from the operational programme during the three- or four-month period starting in the month in which the application for an advance payment is submitted.


2.   Applications for advance payments shall be submitted as decided by the Member State, either on three-monthly basis in January, April, July and October or on a four-monthly basis in January, May and September.
Total advance payments made for a given year may not exceed 80 % of the initially approved amount of aid for the operational programme.


3.   Advances shall be paid subject to the lodging of a security equivalent to 110 % thereof in accordance with Commission Regulation (EEC) No 2220/85 (12).
Conditions shall be provided for by the Member States to ensure that financial contributions to the operational fund have been levied in accordance with Article 52 and Article 53 of this Regulation and previous advance payments and the corresponding producer organisation contribution have actually been spent.


4.   Applications for the release of securities may be submitted during the current programme year and shall be accompanied by supporting documents, such as invoices and documents proving that payment has been made.
Securities shall be released in respect of up to 80 % of advances paid.


5.   The primary requirement within the meaning of Article 20(2) of Regulation (EEC) No 2220/85 shall cover the performance of the operations set out in the operational programmes subject to the undertakings provided for in Article 61(b) and (c) of this Regulation.
In the event of failure to comply with the primary requirement or of serious failure to meet the obligations provided for in Article 61(b) and (c) the security shall be forfeited, without prejudice to other sanctions and penalties to be applied in accordance with Section 3 of Chapter V.
In the event of failure to comply with other requirements, the security shall be forfeited in proportion to the gravity of the irregularity that has been established.


6.   Member States may set a minimum amount and the deadlines for advance payments.



Article 72

Partial payments

Member States may permit producer organisations to apply for the payment of the part of the aid corresponding to the amounts already spent under the operational programme.
Applications may be submitted at any time, but no more than three times in any given year. They shall be accompanied by supporting documents, such as invoices and documents proving that payment has been made.
Payments in respect of applications for parts of the aid may not exceed 80 % of the part of the aid corresponding to the amounts already spent under the operational programme for the period concerned. Member States may set a minimum amount for partial payments and deadlines for applications.





CHAPTER III




Crisis prevention and management measures





Section 1




General Provisions




Article 73

Selection of crisis prevention and management measures

Member States may provide that one or more of the measures listed in Article 103c(2) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall not apply in their territory.


Article 74

Loans to finance crisis prevention and management measures

Loans taken out to finance crisis prevention and management measures pursuant to the third subparagraph of Article 103c(2) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 the repayment period of which exceeds the length of the operational programme may, on duly justified economic grounds, be carried over to a subsequent operational programme.




Section 2




Market withdrawals




Article 75

Definition

This Section lays down rules concerning market withdrawals as referred to in Article 103c(2)(a) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.
For the purposes of this Chapter, ‘products withdrawn from the market’, ‘withdrawn products’ and ‘products not put up for sale’ mean products which are so withdrawn from the market.


Article 76

Marketing standards


1.   Where a marketing standard as referred to in Title II exists for a given product, such product withdrawn from the market shall comply with that standard, except for the provisions on the presentation and marking of products. Products may be withdrawn in bulk, all sizes together, provided that the minimum requirements for class II, in particular as regards quality and size, are complied with.
However, miniature produce as defined in the relevant standard shall comply with the applicable marketing standard, including the provisions on the presentation and marking of products.


2.   If no such marketing standard exists for a given product, the minimum requirements laid down in Annex X shall be met by products withdrawn from the market. The Member States may lay down additional rules supplementing those minimum requirements.



Article 77

Three-year average for market withdrawals for free distribution


1.   The limit of 5 % of the volume of marketed production referred to in Article 103d(4) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall be calculated on the basis of an arithmetic mean of the overall volumes of products for which the producer organisation is recognised and are marketed through the producer organisation during the three previous years.


2.   For recently recognised producer organisations, the data for marketing years prior to recognition shall be:






(a)


where the organisation was a producer group, the equivalent data for that producer group, where applicable; or










(b)


the volume applicable to the application for recognition.







Article 78

Prior notification of withdrawal operations


1.   Producer organisations and associations of producer organisations shall notify in advance the competent authorities of the Member States, by written telecommunication or electronic message, of each withdrawal operation they intend to undertake.
Such notification shall specify, in particular, the list of products taken into intervention and their principal characteristics according to the relevant marketing standards, the estimated quantity of each product concerned, their intended destination and the place where the withdrawn products may be inspected as provided for in Article 108.
Notifications shall include a certificate attesting that the withdrawn products conform to the applicable marketing standards or minimum requirements referred to in Article 76.


2.   Member States shall lay down detailed rules for producer organisations as regards notifications provided for in paragraph 1, in particular as regards time limits.


3.   Within the time limits referred to in paragraph 2, the Member States shall:






(a)


either carry out the check referred to in Article 108(1), following which, if no irregularities are detected, it shall authorise the withdrawal operation as noted in the check; or;










(b)


in the cases referred to in Article 108(3), not carry out the check referred to in Article 108(1), in which case it shall inform the producer organisation of this by a written telecommunication or an electronic message and authorise the withdrawal operation as notified.







Article 79

Support


1.   The support, comprising both the Union contribution and the producer organisation contribution, for market withdrawals shall be no more than the amounts set out in Annex XI for the products referred to in that Annex. For other products, Member States shall set maximum amounts of support.
In case the producer organisation has received compensation from third parties for withdrawn products, the support referred to in the first subparagraph shall be reduced by the net receipts earned by the producer organisations from the products withdrawn from the market. In order to be eligible for support, the products concerned shall be withdrawn from the commercial market for fruit and vegetables.


2.   Market withdrawals shall not exceed 5 % as a proportion of the volume of the marketed production of any given product in any given producer organisation. However, amounts which are disposed of in one of the ways referred to in Article 103d(4) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 or any other way approved by Member States under Article 80(2) of this Regulation shall not be taken into account in that proportion.
The volume of marketed production shall be calculated as average of the volume of marketed production in the previous three years. If this information is not available, the volume of marketed production for which the producer organisation was recognised shall be used.
The percentages referred to in the first subparagraph shall be annual averages over a three year period, with 5 percentage points of annual margin of overrun.


3.   The Union financial assistance in case of market withdrawals of fruit and vegetables which are disposed of by way of free distribution to the charitable organisations and the institutions referred to in Article 103d(4) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall only cover payment for the disposed products in accordance with paragraph 1 of this Article and the costs referred to in Articles 81(1) and 82(1) of this Regulation.



Article 80

Destinations for withdrawn products


1.   Member States shall lay down the permissible destinations for products withdrawn from the market. They shall adopt provisions to ensure that no negative impact on the environment nor any negative phytosanitary consequences result from the withdrawal or its destination. Costs incurred by the producer organisations due to compliance with these provisions shall be eligible as part of the support for market withdrawals under the operational programme.


2.   The destinations referred to in paragraph 1 shall include free distribution within the meaning of Article 103d(4) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 and any other equivalent destinations approved by Member States.
Member States may allow the charitable organisations and institutions referred to in Article 103d(4) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, to ask a symbolic contribution from the final recipients of products withdrawn from the market, in case those products have undergone processing.
Payment in kind by the beneficiaries of free distribution to processors of fruit and vegetables may be allowed, where such payment only compensates for processing costs and where the Member State in which the payment takes places has provided for rules ensuring that processed products are indeed destined for consumption by the final recipients referred to in the second subparagraph.
Member States shall take all the necessary steps to facilitate contacts and co-operation between producer organisations and the charitable organisations and institutions referred to in Article 103d(4) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 they have approved.


3.   Disposal of products to the processing industry shall be possible. Member States shall adopt detailed provisions to ensure that no distortion of competition occurs for the industries concerned within the Union or for imported products and that products withdrawn do not enter the commercial market again. The alcohol resulting from distillation shall be used exclusively for industrial or energy purposes.



Article 81

Transport costs


1.   The transport costs for the free distribution of all products withdrawn from the market shall be eligible under the operational programme on the basis of the flat-rate amounts set according to the distance between the point of withdrawal and the place of delivery set out in Annex XII.
In the case of sea transport, the Member States shall determine the distance between the point of withdrawal and the place of delivery. The compensation may not exceed the cost of land transport over the shortest route between the place of loading and the theoretical point of exit where land transport is possible. A correcting coefficient of 0,6 shall be applied to the amounts as set out in Annex XII.


2.   The transport costs shall be paid to the party which actually bears the financial cost of the transport operation in question.
Payment shall be subject to the presentation of supporting documents certifying in particular:






(a)


the names of the beneficiary organisations;










(b)


the quantity of the products concerned;










(c)


acceptance by the beneficiary organisations and the means of transport used; and










(d)


the distance between the place of withdrawal and the place of delivery.







Article 82

Sorting and packing costs


1.   The costs of sorting and packaging fruit and vegetables withdrawn from the market for free distribution shall be eligible under operational programmes, in the case of products put up in packages of less than 25 kilograms net weight at the flat-rate amounts set out in Part A of Annex XIII.


2.   Packages of products for free distribution shall display the European emblem together with one or more of the references set out in Part B of Annex XIII.


3.   The costs of sorting and packaging shall be paid to the producer organisations which have performed those operations.
Payment shall be subject to the presentation of supporting documents certifying in particular:






(a)


the names of the beneficiary organisations;










(b)


the quantity of the products concerned; and










(c)


acceptance by the beneficiary organisations, specifying the presentation.







Article 83

Conditions for the recipients of withdrawn products


1.   The recipients of withdrawn products referred to in Article 103d(4) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall undertake to:






(a)


comply with this Regulation;










(b)


keep separate stock records and financial accounts for the operations in question;










(c)


accept the checks provided for by Union law; and










(d)


provide the supporting documents on the final destination of each of the products concerned, in the form of a take-over certificate (or equivalent document) certifying that the withdrawn products have been taken over by a third party with a view to their free distribution.




Member States may decide that recipients do not have to keep records or accounts referred to in point (b) of the first subparagraph, if they receive only small quantities and where they consider that the risk is low. That decision and its justification shall be recorded.


2.   The recipients of withdrawn products for other destinations shall undertake to:






(a)


comply with this Regulation;










(b)


keep separate stock records and financial accounts for the operations in question if the Member States considers it as appropriate despite the fact that the product has been denatured before delivery;










(c)


accept the checks provided for by Union law; and










(d)


not request additional aid for the alcohol produced from the products concerned in the case of withdrawn products intended for distillation.









Section 3




Green harvesting and non-harvesting




Article 84

Definitions of green harvesting and non-harvesting


1.   For the purposes of this Regulation, the following definitions shall apply:






(a)


‘green harvesting’ means the total harvesting of non-marketable products on a given area carried out before the beginning of the normal harvest. The products concerned shall not have been already damaged prior to the green harvesting, whether due to climatic reasons or disease or otherwise.










(b)


‘non-harvesting’ means the situation where no commercial production is taken from the area concerned during the normal production cycle. However destruction of products due to climatic event or disease shall not be considered as non-harvesting.






2.   Green harvesting and non-harvesting shall be additional to and different from normal cultivation practices.



Article 85

Conditions for the application of green harvesting and non-harvesting


1.   In relation to green harvesting and non-harvesting, Member States shall:






(a)


adopt detailed provisions on the implementation of the measures, including on prior notifications of non-harvesting and green harvesting, their content and deadlines, on the amount of compensation to be paid and on the application of the measures, as well as the list of products eligible under the measures;










(b)


adopt provisions to ensure that no negative impact on the environment nor any negative phytosanitary consequences result from the implementation of the measures;










(c)


check that the measures are carried out correctly, including in relation to the provisions referred to in points (a) and (b), and, if this is not the case, not to approve the application of the measures.






2.   Producer organisations and associations of producer organisations shall notify in advance the competent authorities of the Member State, by written telecommunication or electronic message, of each green harvesting or non-harvesting operation they intend to undertake.
They shall include in the first notification of any given year and for a given product, an analysis based on the expected market situation which justifies green harvesting as a crisis prevention measure.


3.   Green harvesting and non-harvesting shall not both be applied for the same product and the same given area in any given year, or in any two consecutive years.


4.   Compensation amounts, comprising both the Union contribution and the producer organisation contribution for green harvesting and non-harvesting shall be per hectare payments set by the Member State under paragraph 1(a):






(a)


at the level to cover only additional costs generated by the application of the measure, taking into account the environmental and phytosanitary management needed to comply with the provisions adopted pursuant to paragraph 1(b); or










(b)


at a level to cover not more than 90 % of the maximum support level for market withdrawals as referred to in Article 79.









Section 4




Promotion and communication




Article 86

Implementation of promotion and communication measures


1.   Member States shall adopt detailed provisions on the implementation of promotion and communication measures. Those provisions shall allow for the rapid application of the measures when required.


2.   Actions under promotion and communication measures shall be additional to any on-going promotion and communication actions not related to crisis prevention and management being applied by the producer organisation concerned.





Section 5




Training




Article 87

Implementation of training actions

Member States shall adopt detailed provisions on the implementation of training actions.




Section 6




Harvest insurance




Article 88

Objective of harvest insurance actions

Harvest insurance actions shall be managed by a producer organisation which shall contribute to safeguarding producers’ incomes and to covering market losses incurred by the producer organisation and/or its members where they are affected by natural disasters, climatic events and, where appropriate, diseases or pest infestations.


Article 89

Implementation of harvest insurance actions


1.   Member States shall adopt detailed provisions on the implementation of harvest insurance actions, including those necessary to ensure that harvest insurance actions do not distort competition in the insurance market.


2.   Member States may grant additional national financing to support harvest insurance actions which are benefiting from the operational fund. However, total public support for harvest insurance may not exceed:






(a)


80 % of the cost of the insurance premiums paid for by producers for insurance against losses as a result of adverse climatic events which can be assimilated to natural disasters;










(b)


50 % of the cost of the insurance premiums paid for by producers for insurance against:






(i)


losses referred to in point (a) and against other losses caused by adverse climatic events; and










(ii)


losses caused by animal or plant diseases or pest infestations.








The limit set out in point (b) of the first subparagraph shall apply even in cases where the operational fund is otherwise eligible for 60 % Union financial assistance pursuant to Article 103d(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.


3.   Harvest insurance actions shall not cover insurance payments which compensate producers for more than 100 % of the income loss suffered, taking into account any compensation the producers obtain from other support schemes related to the insured risk.


4.   For the purposes of this Article, an ‘adverse climatic event which can be assimilated to a natural disaster’ shall have the same meaning as in Article 2(8) of Commission Regulation (EC) No 1857/2006 (13).





Section 7




Support for the administrative cost of setting up mutual funds




Article 90

Conditions for support for the administrative cost of setting up mutual funds


1.   Member States shall adopt detailed provisions for support for the administrative cost of setting up mutual funds.


2.   Support for the administrative cost of setting up mutual funds shall comprise both the contribution from the Union and the contribution from the producer organisation. The total amount of support for the administrative cost of setting up mutual funds shall not exceed the following proportion of the contribution of the producer organisation to the mutual fund in the first, second and third year of its operation:






(a)


10 %, 8 % and 4 % respectively in the Member States which acceded to the European Union on 1 May 2004 or thereafter;










(b)


5 %, 4 % and 2 % respectively in other Member States.






3.   A producer organisation may receive the support referred to in the paragraph 2 only once and only within the three first years of operation of the fund. Where a producer organisation only asks for support in the second or the third year of operation of the fund, the support shall be:






(a)


8 % and 4 % respectively in the Member States which acceded to the European Union on 1 May 2004 or thereafter;










(b)


4 % and 2 % respectively in other Member States.






4.   Member States may fix ceilings for the amounts that may be received by a producer organisation as support for the administrative cost of setting up mutual funds.






CHAPTER IV




National Financial Assistance




Article 91

Degree of organisation of producers


1.   For the purposes of Article 103e(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, the degree of organisation of producers in a region of a Member State shall be calculated as the value of fruit and vegetable production that was obtained in the region and marketed by producer organisations, associations of producer organisations and producer groups divided by the total value of the fruit and vegetable production that was obtained in that region.


2.   The degree of organisation of producers in a region of a Member State shall be considered as particularly low where the average of the degrees, calculated as provided for in paragraph 1 for the last three years for which the data are available is less than 20 %.
Only fruit and vegetable production generated in the region referred to in this article may benefit from national financial assistance. For the purposes of this Chapter, a region shall be considered as a distinct part of the territory of a Member State, as a result of its administrative, geographical or economic characteristics.



Article 92

Authorisation to pay national financial assistance


1.   Member States shall submit a request to the Commission for authorisation to grant national financial assistance pursuant to Article 103e(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 for operational programmes to be implemented in any given calendar year by 31 January of that year.
The request shall be accompanied by evidence showing that the degree of organisation of producers in the region concerned is particularly low, as defined in Article 91 of this Regulation, that only products of the fruit and vegetables sector produced in that region benefit from assistance, as well as details of the producer organisations concerned, the amount of assistance concerned and the proportion of financial contributions being made pursuant to Article 103b(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.


2.   The Commission shall approve or refuse the request within three months of its submission. If the Commission does not reply within this period the request shall be considered to have been approved.
If the request is incomplete, the three-month period is suspended and the Member State is informed about the non-compliance found. The suspension shall take effect from the date on which the Member State is informed of the suspension and shall last until a complete request is received.



Article 93

Amendments to the operational programme

A producer organisation wishing to apply for national financial assistance shall, if necessary, amend its operational programme pursuant to Articles 65 or 66.


Article 94

Application for and payment of the national financial assistance


1.   Producer organisations shall apply for the national financial assistance, and Member States shall pay the aid, in accordance with Articles 69 and 70.


2.   Member States may adopt additional rules on the payment of the national financial assistance, including the possibility of advance and partial payments.



Article 95

Union reimbursement of the national financial assistance


1.   Member States may request Union reimbursement of approved national financial assistance actually paid to producer organisations, before 1 January of the second year following the year of implementation of the programme.
The request shall be accompanied by evidence showing that the conditions set out in Article 103e(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 have been fulfilled in three of the previous four years, as well as details of the producer organisations concerned, the amount of assistance actually paid and a description of the operational fund broken out between total amount, contributions from Union, Member State (national financial assistance) and producer organisations and members.


2.   The Commission shall take a decision to approve or refuse the request. The request shall be refused where the rules on the authorisation and reimbursement of national financial assistance have not been complied with or where the rules on producer organisations, the operational fund and operational programmes laid down in this Regulation or Regulation (EC) 1234/2007 have not been respected by the requesting Member State.


3.   Where Union reimbursement of the assistance has been approved, the eligible expenditure shall be declared to the Commission in accordance with the procedure set out in Article 5 of Commission Regulation (EC) No 883/2006 (14).


4.   The proportion of Union reimbursement of national financial assistance shall not exceed 60 % of the national financial assistance granted to the producer organisation.





CHAPTER V




General Provisions





Section 1




Reports and notifications




Article 96

Producer groups and producer organisations’ reports


1.   At the request of the competent authority of the Member State, producer groups and producer organisations shall provide any relevant information needed for the drawing up of the annual report referred to in Article 97(b).


2.   Producer organisations shall submit annual reports, accompanying applications for aid, on the implementation of operational programmes.
Those reports shall concern the following:






(a)


operational programmes implemented during the preceding year;










(b)


main amendments to operational programmes; and










(c)


variances between estimated aid and aid applied for.






3.   For each operational programme implemented, the annual report shall indicate:






(a)


the achievements and results of the operational programme, based on, where relevant, the common output and result indicators set out in Annex VIII and, where appropriate, additional output and result indicators set out in the national strategy; and










(b)


a summary of the major problems encountered in managing the programme and any measures taken to ensure the quality and effectiveness of programme implementation.




Where relevant, the annual report shall specify what effective safeguards are in place, in accordance with the national strategy and in application of Article 103c(5) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, to protect the environment from possible increased pressures coming from investments supported under the operational programme.


4.   For the final year of application of an operational programme, a final report shall replace the annual report referred to in paragraph 1.
Final reports shall show to what extent the objectives pursued by the programmes have been achieved. They shall explain changes to actions and/or methods and identify factors which contributed to the success or failure of the programme’s implementation, which have been or will be considered when subsequent operational programmes are drawn up, or when existing operational programmes are amended.


5.   Without prejudice to specific provisions in this Regulation, where a producer group or a producer organisation fails to notify the Member State as required under this Regulation or Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 or if the notification appears incorrect in the light of objective facts in the Member State’s possession, the Member State shall suspend the preliminary recognition of the producer group or the recognition of the producer organisation until the notification is correctly made.
The Member State shall include details of such cases in its annual report referred to in Article 97(b) of this Regulation.



Article 97

Member States’ notifications concerning producer organisations, associations of producer organisations and producer groups

Member States shall notify the Commission of the following information and documents:






(a)


by 31 January in any given year, the total amount of the operational funds approved that year for all operational programmes. This notification shall make clear both the total amount of the operational funds and the total amount of Union aid granted to those funds. Those figures shall be further broken down between amounts for crisis prevention and management measures and other measures;










(b)


by 15 November in any given year, an annual report on producer organisations, associations of producer organisations and producer groups and operational funds, operational programmes and recognition plans running in the previous year. The annual report shall contain in particular the information set out in Annex XIV;










(c)


by 31 January in any given year, the financial amount corresponding to the annual implementation of recognition plans that run that year. Approved or estimated amounts shall be provided. The notification shall include the following information for each producer group:






(i)


total amount of the annual period of implementation of the recognition plan, the contributions from the Union, the Member States and the producer groups and/or members of the producer groups;










(ii)


a breakdown between the aid referred to in, respectively, Article 103a(1)(a) and (b) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.










Article 98

Member States’ notifications concerning producer prices of fruit and vegetables in the internal market


1.   The competent authorities of the Member States shall notify the Commission, by 12.00, at noon (Brussels time) of each Wednesday, for each market day, of average recorded prices for fruit and vegetables traded on the representative markets listed in Part A of Annex XV.
For fruit and vegetables covered by the general marketing standard, only prices of products meeting that standard shall be notified, whereas prices for products covered by a specific marketing standard shall only concern products of class I.
Notified prices shall be ex packaging station, sorted, packaged and, where applicable, on pallets, expressed in euro per 100 kilograms net weight.
Where data are available, Member States shall notify prices corresponding to the types and varieties of products, sizes and/or presentations specified in Part A of Annex XV. Where recorded prices concern other types, varieties, sizes and/or presentations than those specified in Part A of Annex XV, the competent authorities of Member States shall notify the Commission of the types, varieties, sizes and/or presentations of the products to which prices correspond.


2.   Member States shall identify representative markets in the production area of the fruit and vegetables concerned, on the basis of transactions carried out on physically identifiable markets, such as wholesale markets, auctions or other physical places where supply meets demand, or on the basis of direct transactions between producers, including producer organisations, and individual buyers, such as wholesalers, traders, distribution centres or other relevant operators. Representative markets may also be identified on the basis of a combination of transactions carried out on physically identifiable markets and direct transactions.


3.   The competent authorities of the Member States may notify the Commission of producer prices of the fruit and vegetables and other products listed in Part B of Annex XV on a voluntary basis.


4.   Notifications of prices made in accordance with paragraph 3 shall be done in accordance with guidelines to be adopted by the Commission and be made publicly available by the Commission by the methods it considers appropriate.





Section 2




Checks




Article 99

Unique identification system

Member States shall ensure that a unique identification system applies with regard to all aid applications submitted by the same producer organisation or producer group. This identification shall be compatible with the system to record identity referred to in Article 15(1)(f) of Council Regulation (EC) No 73/2009 (15).


Article 100

Submission procedures

Without prejudice to specific provisions of this Regulation, Member States shall provide for appropriate procedures for the submission of aid applications, requests for recognition or approval of operational programme, as well as payment claims.


Article 101

Sampling

Where it is appropriate to carry out checks by sampling, Member States shall ensure, by their nature and frequency and on the basis of a risk analysis, that the checks are appropriate to the measure concerned.


Article 102

Administrative checks

Administrative checks shall be carried out on all aid applications or payment claims, and shall cover all possible and appropriate elements. The procedures shall require the recording of undertaken operations, the results of the verification and the measures taken in respect of discrepancies.


Article 103

On-the-spot checks


1.   Every on-the-spot check shall be the subject of a monitoring report in order to make it possible to review the details of the checks carried out. The report shall indicate in particular:






(a)


the aid scheme and the application checked;










(b)


the persons present;










(c)


the actions, measures and documents checked; and










(d)


the results of the check.






2.   The beneficiary may be given the opportunity to sign the report to attest his presence at the check and to add observations. Where irregularities are found the beneficiary may receive a copy of the monitoring report.


3.   Advance notice of on-the-spot checks may be given, provided that the purpose of the check is not jeopardised. The advance notice shall be limited to the minimum time necessary.


4.   Where possible, on-the-spot checks provided for in this Regulation and other checks provided for in Union law concerning agricultural subsidies shall be carried out at the same time.



Article 104

Granting of recognition and approval of operational programmes


1.   Prior to granting recognition to a producer organisation under Article 125b(2)(a) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, Members States shall conduct an on-the-spot visit to the producer organisation to verify compliance with the conditions for recognition.


2.   Prior to the approval of an operational programme under Article 64, the competent authority of the Member State shall verify by all appropriate means, including on-the-spot checks, the operational programme submitted for approval and, if applicable, the requests for amendment. Those checks shall in particular concern:






(a)


the accuracy of information referred to in Article 59(a), (b) and (e), which shall be included in the draft operational programme;










(b)


compliance of the programmes with Article 103c of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 as well as with the national framework and the national strategy;










(c)


the eligibility of the actions and the eligibility of the expenditure proposed;










(d)


the consistency and technical quality of programmes, the soundness of the estimates and the aid plan, and the planning of its implementation. Checks shall verify whether measurable targets have been set, so that their achievement can be monitored, and whether the targets set are achievable through implementing the proposed actions; and










(e)


the compliance of the operations for which aid is requested with applicable national and Union law on, in particular, and where relevant, public procurement, State aid and the other appropriate obligatory standards established by national legislation or established in the national framework or the national strategy.







Article 105

Administrative checks on aid applications for operational programmes


1.   Prior to granting the aid, Member States shall carry out administrative checks on all aid applications, which shall be supplemented by on-the-spot checks by sampling as specified in Article 106.


2.   Administrative checks on aid applications shall include, in particular, and as far as this is appropriate for the submitted application, a verification of:






(a)


the annual or, where applicable, the final report transmitted together with the application on the execution of the operational programme;










(b)


the value of marketed production, the contributions to the operational fund and the expenditure incurred;










(c)


the delivery of the products and services and the genuineness of expenditure claimed;










(d)


the conformity of the actions executed with those included in the operational programme as approved;










(e)


the respect of financial or other limits and ceilings imposed.






3.   Expenditure incurred under the operational programme shall be supported by invoices and documents, such as bank extracts, proving that payment has been made. Where this cannot be done, payments shall be supported by documents of equivalent probative value. Invoices used shall be established in the name of the producer organisation, association of producer organisations or the subsidiary in the situation referred to in Article 50(9) or, subject to Member State approval, in the name of one or more of its producer members. However, where relevant, invoices in respect of the personnel costs referred to in Annex IX (2)(b) shall be established in the name of the producer organisation, association of producer organisation or subsidiary in the situation referred to in Article 50(9).



Article 106

On-the-spot checks on aid applications for operational programmes


1.   In the context of the verification of the aid application referred to in Article 69(1), Member States shall carry out on-the-spot checks at the premises of producer organisations so as to ensure compliance with the conditions for granting an aid or the balance thereof for the year concerned.
Such checks shall in particular concern:






(a)


the compliance with the recognition criteria for the year concerned;










(b)


the use of the operational fund in the given year including expenditure declared in claims for advance payments or partial payments, the value of marketed production, the contributions to the operational fund and the expenditure declared as supported by accounting or other documents;










(c)


second level checks for the expenses of market withdrawals and green harvesting and non-harvesting.






2.   The checks referred to in paragraph 1 shall relate to a significant sample of applications each year. The sample shall represent at least 30 % of the total aid applied for, in Member States which have more than 10 recognised producer organisations. In other cases, each producer organisation shall be visited at least once every three years.
At least one check shall be made on each producer organisation before the payment of the aid or the balance thereof relating to the final year of its operational programme.


3.   The results of the on-the-spot checks shall be evaluated to establish whether any problems encountered are of a systemic character, entailing a risk for other similar actions, beneficiaries or bodies. The evaluation shall also identify the causes of such situations, any further examination which may be required and the necessary corrective and preventive action.
If the checks reveal significant irregularities in a region or part of a region or for a specific producer organisation, the Member State shall carry out additional checks during the year concerned and shall increase the percentage of corresponding applications to be checked the following year.


4.   The Member State shall determine which producer organisations are to be checked on the basis of a risk analysis.
The risk analysis shall in particular take account of:






(a)


the amount of aid;










(b)


the findings of the checks in previous years;










(c)


a random element; and










(d)


other parameters to be determined by Member States.







Article 107

On-the-spot checks on measures of operational programmes


1.   Through the on-the-spot checks concerning the measures of operational programmes, Member States shall verify in particular the following:






(a)


the implementation of the actions contained in the operational programme;










(b)


that the implementation or intended implementation of the action is consistent with the use described in the operational programme as approved;










(c)


for an adequate number of expenditure items, that the nature and timing of the relevant expenditure comply with Union law and correspond to the approved specifications;










(d)


that the expenditure incurred can be supported by accounting or other documents; and










(e)


the value of marketed production.






2.   The value of marketed production shall be verified on the basis of the financial accounting system as audited and certified under national law.
To that end, the Member States may decide that the declaration of the value of marketed production shall be certified in the same way as the financial accounting data.
The check on the declaration of the value of marketed production may be carried out before the relevant aid application is transmitted. They shall be carried out at the latest before payment of the aid.


3.   Except in exceptional circumstances, the on-the-spot check shall include a visit to the action or, if the action is intangible, to the action promoter. In particular, actions on individual holdings covered by the sample referred to in Article 106(2) shall be subject of at least one visit to verify their execution.
However, Member States may decide not to carry out such visits for smaller actions, or where they consider that the risk is low that the conditions for receiving aid are not fulfilled, or that the reality of the operation has not been respected. That decision and its justification shall be recorded.


4.   The on-the-spot check shall cover all the commitments and obligations of the producer organisation or its members which can be checked at the time of the visit.


5.   Only checks meeting all the requirements of this Article may be counted towards the fulfilment of the checking rate set out in Article 106(2).



Article 108

First-level checks on withdrawal operations


1.   Member States shall make first-level checks on withdrawal operations in each producer organisation, comprising a documentary and identity check and a physical check, where appropriate, by sampling, of the weight of the products withdrawn from the market and a check on compliance with Article 76, in accordance with the procedures laid down in Chapter II of Title II. The check shall take place following receipt of the notification referred to in Article 78(1), within the time limits set in accordance with Article 78(2).


2.   The first-level checks provided for in paragraph 1 shall cover 100 % of the quantity of products withdrawn from the market. At the end of this check, the withdrawn products other than those for free distribution shall be denatured or disposed of to the processing industry under the supervision of the competent authorities under the terms and conditions laid down by the Member State under Article 80.


3.   By way of derogation from paragraph 2, where the products are for free distribution, Member States may check a smaller percentage than that laid down in that paragraph, provided it is not less than 10 % of the quantities concerned during the marketing year of any given producer organisation. The check may take place at the premises of producer organisation and/or at the sites of the recipients of the products. In the event that the checks reveal significant irregularities, the competent authorities of the Member State shall carry out additional checks.



Article 109

Second-level checks on withdrawal operations


1.   In the framework of the checks referred to in Article 106, Member States shall make second-level checks on withdrawal operations.
Member States shall lay down criteria for analysing and evaluating the risk of any given producer organisation carrying out non-compliant withdrawal operations. Such criteria shall relate, among other things, to the findings of previous first- and second-level checks, and whether or not a producer organisation has some form of quality-assurance procedure. They shall use those criteria to determine for each producer organisation a minimum frequency of second-level checks.


2.   The checks referred to in paragraph 1 shall comprise on-the-spot checks at the premises of producer organisations and the recipients of withdrawn products, in order to ensure that the conditions for payment of Union aid have been complied with. Those checks shall include:






(a)


the specific stock and accounting records to be kept by all producer organisations which carry out one or more withdrawal operations during the marketing year concerned;










(b)


verification of the quantities marketed as declared in the aid applications, checking in particular the stock and accounting records, the invoices and, where necessary, their veracity and ensuring that the declarations tally with the accounting and/or tax data of the producer organisations concerned;










(c)


checks that the accounts are correct, in particular the veracity of net receipts by the producer organisations as declared in their payment applications, the proportionality of any withdrawal costs, ensuring that those amounts are correct; and










(d)


checks on the destination of withdrawn products as declared in the payment application and checks on the appropriate denaturing to ensure that the producer organisations and recipients have complied with this Regulation.






3.   The checks referred to in paragraph 2 shall be carried out at the premises of producer organisations concerned and the recipients associated with those organisations. Each check shall include a sample representing at least 5 % of the quantities withdrawn during the marketing year by the producer organisation.


4.   The specific stock and accounting records referred to in paragraph 2(a) shall show, for each product withdrawn, the amounts moved, expressed in volume, of:






(a)


the production delivered by members of the producer organisation and by members of other producer organisations in accordance with Article 125a(2)(b) and (c) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007;










(b)


sales by the producer organisation, broken down by products prepared for the fresh market and other types of products including raw materials for processing; and










(c)


products withdrawn from the market.






5.   The checks on the destination of products referred to in paragraph 4(c) shall include, in particular:






(a)


a sample check on the separate accounts to be kept by recipients and, where necessary, verification that these tally with the accounts required under national law; and










(b)


checks on compliance with the relevant environmental requirements;






6.   If the second-level checks reveal significant irregularities, the competent authorities of the Member State shall carry out more detailed second-level checks for the marketing year concerned and shall increase the frequency of second-level checks at the premises of producer organisations or their associations concerned during the following marketing year.



Article 110

Green harvesting and non-harvesting


1.   Before a green harvesting operation takes place, Member States shall verify by an on-the-spot check that the products concerned are not damaged and the given area has been well maintained. After green harvesting, Member States shall verify that the area concerned has been harvested in total and the harvested product has been denatured.
After the harvest period, Member States shall verify the reliability of the analysis based on the expected market situation referred to in Article 85(2). They shall also analyse any differences between the expected market situation and the real market situation.


2.   Before a non-harvesting operation takes place, Member States shall verify by an on-the-spot check that the given area has been well maintained, that no partial harvest has already taken place and that the product is well developed and would in general be sound, fair and of marketable quality.
Member States shall ensure that the production is denatured. If this is not possible, they shall ensure, by an on-the-spot visit or visits during the harvest season, that no harvest takes place.


3.   Article 109(1),(2),(3) and (6) shall apply mutatis mutandis.



Article 111

Checks before approving recognition plans of producer groups


1.   Before approving a recognition plan of a producer group under Article 125e(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, Members States shall conduct an on-the-spot check on the legal entity or clearly defined part of the legal entity.


2.   The Member State shall verify by all appropriate means, including the on-the-spot check:






(a)


the accuracy of the information provided in the recognition plan;










(b)


the commercial consistency and the technical quality of the plan, the soundness of the estimates and the planning of its implementation;










(c)


the eligibility of the actions and the eligibility and reasonableness of the expenditure proposed; and










(d)


the compliance of the operations for which support is requested with applicable national and Union law and in particular, provisions on public procurement, State aid and the other appropriate obligatory standards established by national legislation or established in the national framework or the national strategy.







Article 112

Checks on aid applications of producer groups


1.   Prior to granting payment, Member States shall carry out administrative checks on all aid applications submitted by producer groups, as well as on-the-spot checks by sampling.


2.   Following the submission of the aid application referred to in Article 45, Member States shall carry out on-the-spot checks on producer groups so as to ensure compliance with the conditions for granting aid for the year concerned.
Those checks shall in particular concern:






(a)


compliance with the recognition criteria for the year concerned; and










(b)


the value of marketed production as well as the implementation of the measures contained in the recognition plan and the expenses incurred.






3.   The checks referred to in paragraph 2 shall relate to a significant sample of applications each year. The sample shall represent at least 30 % of the total amount of aid.
All producer groups shall be checked at least once every five years.


4.   Articles 105 and 107 shall apply mutatis mutandis.



Article 113

Transnational producer organisations and transnational associations of producer organisations


1.   The Member State in which a transnational producer organisation or a transnational association of producer organisations has its head office shall have overall responsibility for organisation of checks on that organisation or association in respect of notably the operational programme and operational fund and shall apply sanctions to it where necessary.


2.   The other Member States required to provide the administrative co-operation referred to in Article 28(2)(c) and Article 35(2)(c) shall carry out such administrative and on the spot checks as required by the Member State referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article, and report the results to them. They shall respect all deadlines set by the Member State referred to in paragraph 1.


3.   The rules applicable in the Member State referred to in paragraph 1 shall apply in relation to the producer organisation and the operational programme and operational fund. However, in respect of environmental, phytosanitary questions, and in relation to the disposal of withdrawn products, the law of the Member State where the production takes place shall apply.





Section 3




Sanctions




Article 114

Non-respect of recognition criteria


1.   Member States shall withdraw the recognition of a producer organisation if a failure to respect the criteria for recognition is substantial and results from the fact that the producer organisation acted deliberately or by serious negligence.
Member States shall in particular withdraw the recognition of a producer organisation if a failure to respect the criteria for recognition concerns:






(a)


a breach of the requirements of Articles 21, 23, 26(1) and (2) or 31; or










(b)


a situation where the value of marketed production falls, in two consecutive years, below the limit set by the Member State pursuant to Article 125b(1)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.




The withdrawal of recognition under this paragraph shall take effect from the date from which the conditions for recognition were not fulfilled, subject to any applicable horizontal legislation at national level on limitation periods.


2.   Where paragraph 1 does not apply, Member States shall suspend the recognition of a producer organisation if a failure to respect the criteria for recognition is substantial but is only temporary.
During the period of suspension, no aid shall be paid. The suspension shall take effect from the day where the check has taken place and shall end on the day of the check which shows that the criteria concerned have been fulfilled.
The period of suspension shall not exceed 12 months. If the criteria concerned are subsequently not fulfilled after 12 months, recognition shall be withdrawn.
Member States may make payments after the deadline set out in Article 70 where this is necessary in order to apply this paragraph. However, those later payments may not in any case be made later than 15 October of the second year following the year of implementation of the programme.


3.   In other cases of a failure to respect the criteria for recognition, where paragraphs 1 and 2 do not apply, Member States shall send a warning letter stating the corrective measures to be taken. Member States may delay payments of aid until the corrective measures are taken.
Member States may make payments after the deadline set out in Article 70 where this is necessary in order to apply this paragraph. However, those later payments may not in any case be made later than 15 October of the second year following the year of implementation of the programme.
A failure to take the corrective measures within a 12 month period shall be regarded as substantial failure to respect the criteria and paragraph 2 shall subsequently be applied.



Article 115

Fraud


1.   Where a producer organisation, an association of producer organisations or a producer group is found to have committed fraud in respect of aid covered by Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, Member States shall, without prejudice to any other sanctions and penalties applicable under Union and national legislation:






(a)


withdraw the recognition of the producer organisation, association of producer organisations or producer group;










(b)


exclude the actions or operations concerned from support under the operational programme or recognition plan concerned and recover any aid already paid for that operation; and










(c)


exclude the producer organisation, association of producer organisations or producer group from support under the operational programme or recognition plan concerned during the next year.






2.   Member States may suspend the recognition of a producer organisation, an association of producer organisations or a producer groups, or suspend payments to such a body if they are suspected of having committed fraud in respect of aid covered by Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.



Article 116

Producer groups


1.   Member States shall apply, mutatis mutandis, the sanctions and penalties provided for in Article 114 and/or 117 to recognition plans.


2.   In addition to paragraph 1, if, after the end of the period set by the Member State under Article 49(4), the producer group is not recognised as producer organisation, the Member State shall recover:






(a)


100 % of the aid paid to the producer group if the failure to achieve recognition was due to the producer group acting deliberately or by serious negligence; or










(b)


50 % of the aid paid to the producer group in all other cases.







Article 117

Operational programme


1.   Payments shall be calculated on the basis of what is found eligible.


2.   The Member State shall examine the application for aid received from the beneficiary, and establish the amounts that are eligible for support. It shall establish:






(a)


the amount that would be payable to the beneficiary based solely on the application;










(b)


the amount that is payable to the beneficiary after an examination of the eligibility of the application.






3.   If the amount established pursuant to paragraph 2(a) exceeds the amount established pursuant to paragraph 2(b) by more than 3 %, a penalty shall be applied. The amount of the penalty shall be the difference between the amounts calculated in paragraph 2(a) and (b).
However, no penalty shall be applied if the producer organisation or producer group is able to demonstrate that it is not responsible for the inclusion of the ineligible amount.


4.   Paragraphs 2 and 3 shall apply mutatis mutandis to ineligible expenditure identified during on-the-spot or subsequent checks.


5.   If the value of marketed production is declared and checked before the application for aid, the declared and approved values shall be used when establishing the amounts pursuant to paragraph 2(a) and (b) respectively.



Article 118

Sanctions following first-level checks on withdrawal operations

If, following the check referred to in Article 108, irregularities are found with regard to the marketing standards or the minimum requirements referred to in Article 76, the beneficiary shall be required:






(a)


to pay a penalty of the amount of the Union contribution, calculated on the basis of the quantities of withdrawn products not in conformity with the marketing standards or minimum requirements, if those quantities are less than 10 % of the quantities notified pursuant to Article 78 for the withdrawal operation in question;










(b)


to pay a penalty of the double amount of the Union contribution, if those quantities are between 10 % and 25 % of the quantities notified; or










(c)


to pay a penalty of the amount of the Union contribution for the entire quantity notified pursuant to Article 78, where those quantities exceed 25 % of the quantity notified.






Article 119

Other sanctions applicable to producer organisations regarding withdrawal operations


1.   The penalties referred to in Article 117 shall cover aid applied for in respect of withdrawal operations as integrated parts of operational programme expenditure.


2.   Expenditure for withdrawal operation shall be considered as ineligible if the products not put up for sale have not been disposed of as provided for by the Member State under Article 80(1) or that the withdrawal or its destination has had a negative impact on the environment or any negative phytosanitary consequences in contravention of the provisions adopted under Article 80(1).



Article 120

Sanctions applicable to recipients of withdrawn products

Where irregularities attributable to the recipients of withdrawn products are detected during checks made in accordance with Articles 108 and 109, the following sanctions shall apply:






(a)


the recipients shall cease to be eligible to receive withdrawals; and










(b)


recipients of products withdrawn from the market shall be obliged to repay the value of the products they received plus the related sorting, packaging and transport costs in accordance with the rules laid down by the Member States.




The sanction provided for in point (a) shall take effect immediately and continue for at least one marketing year. It may be extended depending on the seriousness of the irregularity.


Article 121

Green harvesting and non-harvesting


1.   With regard to green harvesting, if it is found that the producer organisation has not fulfilled its obligations the producer organisation shall pay by way of penalty the amount of the compensation relating to the areas for which the obligation has not been respected. A failure to fulfil obligations shall include cases where:






(a)


the Member State finds, during the verification referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 110(1), that the green harvesting measure was not justified on the basis of the analysis of the expected market situation existing at the time;










(b)


the area notified for green harvesting is not eligible for green harvesting; or










(c)


the area is not totally harvested or the production not denatured.






2.   With regard to non-harvesting, if it is found that the producer organisation has not fulfilled its obligations the producer organisation shall pay by way of penalty the amount of the compensation relating to the areas for which the obligation has not been respected. A failure to fulfil obligations shall include cases where:






(a)


the area notified for non-harvesting is not eligible for non-harvesting;










(b)


a harvest or partial harvest has nevertheless taken place; or










(c)


there has been a negative impact on the environment or any negative phytosanitary consequences for which the producer organisation is responsible.






3.   The penalties referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 shall apply in addition to any penalty imposed pursuant to Article 117.



Article 122

Preventing an on-the-spot check

An aid application shall be rejected for the part of expenditure concerned if the producer organisation, the member or the relevant representative prevents an on-the-spot check from being carried out.


Article 123

Payment of recovered aid and penalties


1.   Producer organisations, associations of producer organisations, producer groups or other operators concerned shall reimburse unduly paid aid with interest and pay the penalties provided for in this Section.
The interest shall be calculated:






(a)


on the basis of the period elapsing between payment and reimbursement by the beneficiary;










(b)


at the rate applied by the European Central Bank to its main refinancing operations published in the ‘C’ series of the Official Journal of the European Union and in force on the date on which the undue payment is made, plus three percentage points.






2.   Aid recovered, interest and penalties imposed shall be paid to the European Agricultural Guarantee Fund.



Article 124

Notification of irregularities

The application of administrative sanctions and penalties and the recovery of unduly paid amounts, as provided for in this Section, are without prejudice to the notification of irregularities to the Commission pursuant to Commission Regulation (EC) No 1848/2006 (16).




Section 4




Monitoring and evaluation of operational programmes and of national strategies




Article 125

Common performance indicators


1.   Both the national strategies and the operational programmes shall be subject to monitoring and evaluation aimed at assessing the progress made towards achieving the objectives set for operational programmes, as well as efficiency and effectiveness in relation to those objectives.


2.   Progress, efficiency and effectiveness shall be assessed by means of common performance indicators, as set out in Annex VIII, relating to the baseline situation as well as to the financial execution, outputs, results and impact of the operational programmes implemented.


3.   Where deemed appropriate by a Member State, the national strategy shall specify a limited set of additional indicators specific to that strategy, reflecting national and/or regional needs, conditions and objectives specific to the operational programmes implemented by producer organisations. Where available, additional indicators concerning environmental objectives which are not covered by common performance indicators shall be included.



Article 126

Monitoring and evaluation procedures in relation to operational programmes


1.   Producer organisations shall ensure the monitoring and evaluation of their operational programmes by making use of relevant indicators among the common performance indicators referred to in Article 125 and, where appropriate, of the additional indicators specified in the national strategy.
To this end, they shall establish a system to collect, record and maintain information useful for the compilation of those indicators.


2.   Monitoring shall be aimed at assessing the progress made towards achieving the specific targets that have been set for the operational programme. It shall be carried out by means of financial, output and result indicators. The results of the exercise are intended to serve:






(a)


to verify the quality of programme implementation;










(b)


to identify any need for adjustments or review of the operational programme aimed at achieving the goals set for the programme or at improving the management of the programme, including its financial management;










(c)


to contribute to meeting reporting requirements concerning the implementation of the operational programme.




Information concerning the results of the monitoring activities shall be included in each annual report, as referred to in Article 96(1), which the producer organisation is required to transmit to the National Authority in charge of the management of the national strategy.


3.   Evaluation shall take the form of a separate mid-term evaluation report.
The mid-term evaluation exercise, which may be carried out with the aid of a specialised consultancy office, shall be aimed at examining the degree of utilisation of financial resources, the efficiency and the effectiveness of the operational programme, and assessing the progress made in relation to the overall objectives of the programme. To this end, use shall be made of common performance indicators relating to the baseline situation, results and, where appropriate, impacts.
Where relevant, the mid-term evaluation exercise shall include a qualitative assessment of the results and the impact of the environmental actions aimed at:






(a)


the prevention of soil erosion;










(b)


a reduction in the use of and/or better management of plant protection products;










(c)


the protection of habitats and biodiversity; or










(d)


landscape conservation.




The results of the exercise shall be used:






(a)


to improve the quality of the operational programmes managed by the producer organisation;










(b)


to identify any need for substantive change of the operational programme;










(c)


to contribute to meeting reporting requirements concerning the implementation of the operational programmes; and










(d)


to draw lessons useful in improving the quality, efficiency and effectiveness of future operational programmes managed by the producer organisation.




The mid-term evaluation exercise shall be carried out during the implementation of the operational programme, in time for allowing the results of the evaluation to be considered in the preparation of the subsequent operational programme.
The mid-term evaluation report shall be annexed to the corresponding annual report referred to in Article 96(1).



Article 127

Monitoring and evaluation procedures in relation to the national strategy


1.   Monitoring and evaluation of the national strategy shall be carried out by using relevant indicators among the common performance indicators referred to in Article 125 and, where appropriate, additional indicators specified in the national strategy.


2.   Member States shall establish a system to collect, record and maintain information in computerised form adequate for the purpose of compiling the indicators referred to in Article 125. To this end, they shall build on the information transmitted by the producer organisation in relation to the monitoring and the evaluation of their operational programmes.


3.   Monitoring shall be on-going and aimed at assessing the progress made towards achieving the objectives and the targets set for the operational programmes. It shall be carried out by means of financial, output and result indicators. To this end, use shall be made of the information provided in the annual progress reports transmitted by the producer organisation concerning the monitoring of their operational programmes. The results of the monitoring exercises shall be used:






(a)


to verify the quality of the implementation of the operational programmes;










(b)


to identify any need for adjustments or review of the national strategy aimed at achieving the goals set for the strategy or at improving the management of the strategy implementation, including the financial management of the operational programmes; and










(c)


to contribute to meeting reporting requirements concerning the implementation of the national strategy.






4.   Evaluation shall be aimed at assessing the progress made towards the overall objectives of the strategy. It shall be carried out by means of indicators relating to the baseline situation, results and, where appropriate, impact. To this end, use shall be made of the results of the monitoring and mid-term evaluation of the operational programmes as indicated in the annual progress reports and final reports transmitted by the producer organisations. The results of the evaluation exercises shall be used:






(a)


to improve the quality of the strategy;










(b)


to identify any need for substantive change of the strategy; and










(c)


to contribute to meeting reporting requirements concerning the implementation of national strategy.




The evaluation shall include an evaluation exercise carried out in 2012, but in time to allow its results to be included in a separate evaluation report to be annexed, in the same year, to the annual national report referred to in Article 97(b). The report shall examine the degree of utilisation of financial resources, the efficiency and effectiveness of the operational programmes implemented, and assess the effects and impact of those programmes, in relation to the objectives, targets and goals set by the strategy and, where appropriate, other objectives set in Article 103c(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007. It shall be aimed at drawing lessons useful in improving the quality of future national strategies, and in particular at identifying possible shortcomings in the definition of objectives, targets or measures eligible for support, or needs for defining new instruments.






CHAPTER VI




Extension of rules to producers of an economic area




Article 128

Notification of list of economic areas

The notification of the list of economic areas referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 125f(2) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall include all the information needed to assess whether the conditions laid down in the first subparagraph of Article 125f(2) of that Regulation have been complied with.


Article 129

Notification of binding rules; representativeness


1.   When a Member State notifies rules it has made binding for a given product and economic area pursuant to Article 125g of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, it shall inform at the same time the Commission of:






(a)


the producer organisation or association of producer organisations which requested the extension of the rules;










(b)


the number of producers who belong to that producer organisation or association of producer organisations and the total number of producers in the economic area concerned; such information shall be given in respect of the situation obtaining at the time when the application for extension is made;










(c)


the total production of the economic area and the production marketed by the producer organisation or association of producer organisations during the last marketing year for which figures are available;










(d)


the date from which the rules to be extended have applied to the producer organisation or association of producer organisations concerned; and










(e)


the date from which the extension is to take effect and the duration of application of the extension.






2.   For the purposes of determining representativeness within the meaning of Article 125f(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, the Member States shall lay down rules excluding:






(a)


producers whose production is intended essentially for direct sale to consumers on the holding or in the production area;










(b)


direct sales as referred to in point (a);










(c)


produce delivered for processing as referred to in Article 125f(4)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 except where the rules in question apply entirely or partly to such produce.







Article 130

Financial contributions

Where a Member State decides, pursuant to Article 125i of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, that producers who do not belong to producer organisations are liable for a financial contribution, it shall forward to the Commission the information needed to assess compliance with the conditions laid down in that Article.
Such information shall include in particular the basis on which the contribution is calculated and the unit amount thereof, the beneficiary or beneficiaries and the nature of the various costs referred to in Article 125i of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.


Article 131

Extensions beyond one marketing year

Where it is decided to apply an extension for a period exceeding one marketing year, the Member States shall verify in respect of each marketing year that the conditions with regard to representativeness laid down in Article 125f(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 continue to be complied with throughout the period of application of the extension.
If Member States find that the conditions are no longer complied with, they shall immediately repeal the extension with effect from the beginning of the following marketing year.
Member States shall immediately inform the Commission of any repeal, which shall make such information publicly available by means it considers appropriate.


Article 132

Produce sold on the tree; buyers


1.   In cases where producers not belonging to a producer organisation sell their produce on the tree, the buyer shall, for the purposes of compliance with the rules referred to in points 1(e), 1(f) and 3 of Annex XVIa to Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, be considered as having produced that produce.


2.   The Member State concerned may decide that rules listed in Annex XVIa to Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 other than those referred to in paragraph 1 may be made binding on buyers where they are responsible for the management of the production concerned.





TITLE IV


TRADE WITH THIRD COUNTRIES




CHAPTER I




Import duties and entry price system





Section 1




Entry price system




Article 133

Scope and definitions


1.   This Section lays down the rules for the application of Article 140a of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.


2.   For the purposes of this Section:






(a)


‘lot’ means the goods presented under a declaration of release for free circulation, covering only goods of the same origin falling within one single CN code; and










(b)


‘importer’ means the declarant within the meaning of Article 4(18) of Council Regulation (EEC) No 2913/92 (17).







Article 134

Notification of prices and quantities of products imported


1.   For each product and for the periods set out in Part A of Annex XVI, for each market day and each origin, the Member States shall notify the Commission, by 12 noon (Brussels time) the following working day, of:






(a)


the average representative prices of the products imported from third countries sold on the representative import markets referred to in Article 135, and significant prices recorded on other markets for large quantities of imported products, or, where no prices for the representative markets are available, significant prices for imported products recorded on other markets; and










(b)


the total quantities relating to the prices referred to in point (a).




Where the total quantities referred to in point (b) are less than one tonne, the corresponding prices shall not be notified to the Commission.


2.   The prices referred to in paragraph 1(a) shall be recorded:






(a)


for each of the products listed in Part A of Annex XVI;










(b)


for all of the available varieties and sizes; and










(c)


at the importer/wholesaler stage or the wholesaler/retailer stage where no prices at the importer/wholesaler stage are available.




They shall be reduced by the following amounts:






(a)


a marketing margin of 15 % for the marketing centres of London, Milan and Rungis and of 8 % for other marketing centres; and










(b)


costs of transport and insurance within the customs territory of the Union.




For the costs of freight and insurance to be deducted pursuant to the second subparagraph, the Member States may fix standard amounts for deduction. Such standard amounts and the methods for calculating them shall be notified to the Commission without delay.


3.   The prices recorded in accordance with paragraph 2 shall, where they are established at the wholesaler/retailer stage, first be reduced by an amount equal to 9 % to take account of the wholesaler’s trade margin, and then by an amount equal to EUR 0,7245 per 100 kilograms to take account of the costs of handling and market taxes and charges.


4.   For products listed in Part A of Annex XVI covered by a specific marketing standard, the following shall be deemed to be representative:






(a)


the prices of Class I products, provided that the quantities in that class account for at least 50 % of the total quantities marketed;










(b)


the prices of Class I products plus, where products in that class account for less than 50 % of the total quantities, the prices as established of Class II products for quantities enabling 50 % of the total quantities marketed to be covered;










(c)


the prices as established for Class II products, where Class I products are not available, unless it is decided to apply an adjustment coefficient to them if, as a result of the production conditions for products of the origin in question, those products are not normally and traditionally marketed in Class I as a result of their quality characteristics.




The adjustment coefficient referred to in point (c) of the first subparagraph shall be applied to prices after deduction of the amounts referred to in paragraph 2.
For products listed in Part A of Annex XVI that are not covered by a specific marketing standard, prices of products complying with the general marketing standard shall be deemed to be representative.



Article 135

Representative markets

Member States shall inform the Commission of the customary market days for the markets listed in Annex XVII which shall be deemed to be representative markets.


Article 136

Standard import values


1.   For each product and for the periods set out in Part A of Annex XVI, the Commission shall fix, each working day and for each origin, a standard import value equal to the weighted average of the representative prices referred to in Article 134, less a standard amount of EUR 5/100 kg and the ad valorem customs duties.


2.   Where a standard import value is established for the products and for the periods of application listed in Part A of Annex XVI, in accordance with this Section, the unit price as referred to in Article 152(1)(a) of Commission Regulation (EEC) No 2454/93 (18) shall not apply. It shall be replaced by the standard import value referred to in paragraph 1.


3.   Where no standard import value is in force for a product of a given origin, the average of standard import values in force for that product shall apply.


4.   During the periods of application set out in Part A of Annex XVI, the standard import values shall remain applicable until they are changed. They shall cease to apply, however, where no average representative price has been notified to the Commission for seven consecutive market days.
Where, pursuant to the first subparagraph, no standard import value applies to a given product, the standard import value applicable to that product shall be equal to the last average standard import value.


5.   By way of derogation from paragraph 1, where it has not been possible to calculate a standard import value, no standard import value shall be applicable from the first day of the periods of application set out in Part A of Annex XVI.


6.   The representative prices in euro shall be converted using the representative market rate calculated for the day in question.


7.   The standard import values expressed in euro shall be made publicly available by the Commission by the methods it considers appropriate.



Article 137

Entry price basis


1.   The entry price on the basis of which the products listed in Part A of Annex XVI are classified in the Common Customs Tariff shall be equal to, as the importer chooses:






(a)


the fob price of the products in their country of origin plus the costs of insurance and freight up to the borders of the customs territory of the Union, where that price and those costs are known at the time the declaration of release of the products for free circulation is made. Where those prices are higher by more than 8 % than the standard value applicable to the product in question at the time the declaration of release for free circulation is made, the importer must lodge the security referred to in Article 248(1) of Regulation (EEC) No 2454/93. For this purpose, the amount of import duty for which the products may finally be liable shall be the amount of duty which he would have paid if the product in question had been classified on the basis of the standard value concerned; or










(b)


the customs value calculated in accordance with Article 30(2)(c) of Regulation (EEC) No 2913/92 applied only to the imported products in question. In that case, the duty shall be deducted as provided for in Article 136(1) of this Regulation. In that case the importer shall lodge the security referred to in Article 248(1) of Regulation (EEC) No 2454/93, equal to the amount of duty which he would have paid if the classification of the products had been made on the basis of the standard import value applicable to the lot in question; or










(c)


the standard import value calculated in accordance with Article 136 of this Regulation.






2.   The entry price on the basis of which the products listed in Part B of Annex XVI are classified in the Common Customs Tariff shall be equal to, as the importer chooses:






(a)


the fob price of the products in their country of origin plus the costs of insurance and freight up to the borders of the customs territory of the Union, where that price and those costs are known at the time the customs declaration is made. If the customs authorities deem that a security is required pursuant to Article 248 of Regulation (EEC) No 2454/93, the importer must lodge a security equal to the maximum amount of duty applicable to the product in question; or










(b)


the customs value calculated in accordance with Article 30(2)(c) of Regulation (EEC) No 2913/92 applied only to the imported products in question. In that case, the duty shall be deducted as provided for in Article 136(1) of this Regulation. In that case the importer must lodge the security referred to in Article 248 of Regulation (EEC) No 2454/93, equal to the maximum amount of duty applicable to the product in question.






3.   Where the entry price is calculated on the basis of the fob price of the products in the country of origin, the customs value shall be calculated on the basis of the relevant sale at that price.
When the entry price is calculated in accordance with one of the procedures provided for in paragraph 1(b) or (c) or paragraph 2(b), the customs value shall be calculated on the same basis as the entry price.


4.   The importer shall have one month from the sale of the products in question, subject to a limit of four months from the date of acceptance of the declaration of release for free circulation, to prove that the lot was disposed of under the conditions confirming the correctness of the prices referred to in paragraph 1(a) or paragraph 2(a), or to determine the customs value referred to in paragraph 1(b) and paragraph 2(b). Failure to meet one of these deadlines shall entail the loss of the security lodged, without prejudice to the application of paragraph 5.
The security lodged shall be released to the extent that proof of the conditions of disposal is provided to the satisfaction of the customs authorities.
Otherwise the security shall be forfeit by way of payment of the import duties.


5.   The time limit of four months referred to in paragraph 4 may be extended by the competent authorities of the Member State by a maximum of three months at the request of the importer, which must be duly justified.


6.   If on verification the competent authorities establish that the requirements of this Article have not been met, they shall recover the duty due in accordance with Article 220 of Regulation (EEC) No 2913/92. The amount of the duty to be recovered or remaining to be recovered shall include interest from the date the goods were released for free circulation up to the date of recovery. The interest rate applied shall be that in force for recovery operations under national law.





Section 2




Additional import duties




Article 138

Scope and definitions


1.   An additional import duty as referred to in Article 141(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, hereinafter ‘additional duty’, may be applied to the products and during the periods listed in Annex XVIII on the conditions set out in this Section.


2.   Trigger levels for the additional duties are listed in Annex XVIII.



Article 139

Notification of volumes


1.   For each of the products listed in Annex XVIII and during the periods indicated, Member States shall notify the Commission of details of the volumes put into free circulation using the method for the surveillance of preferential imports set out in Article 308d of Regulation (EEC) No 2454/93.
Such notification shall take place no later than 12 noon Brussels time each Wednesday for the volumes put into free circulation during the preceding week.


2.   Declarations for release for free circulation of products covered by this Section which the customs authorities may accept at the importer’s request without their containing certain particulars referred to in Annex 37 to Regulation (EEC) No 2454/93 shall contain, in addition to the particulars referred to in Article 254 of that Regulation, an indication of the net mass (kg) of the products concerned.
Where the simplified declaration procedure referred to in Article 260 of Regulation (EEC) No 2454/93 is used to put into free circulation products covered by this Section, the simplified declarations shall contain, in addition to other requirements, an indication of the net mass (kg) of the products concerned.
Where the local clearance procedure referred to in Article 263 of Regulation (EEC) No 2454/93 is used to put into free circulation products covered by this Section, the notification to the customs authorities referred to in Article 266(1) of that Regulation shall contain all necessary data for the identification of the goods, as well as an indication of the net mass (kg) of the products concerned.
Article 266(2)(b) of Regulation (EEC) No 2454/93 shall not apply to imports of the products covered by this Section.



Article 140

Levying of additional duty


1.   If it is found that, for one of the products and one of the periods listed in Annex XVIII, the quantity put into free circulation exceeds the corresponding triggering volume the Commission shall levy an additional duty unless the imports are unlikely to disturb the Union market, or the effects would be disproportionate to the intended objective.


2.   The additional duty shall be levied on quantities put into free circulation after the date of application of that duty, provided that:






(a)


their tariff classification determined in accordance with Article 137 entails application of the highest specific duties applicable to imports of the origin in question;










(b)


importation is effected during the period of application of the additional duty.







Article 141

Amount of additional duty

The additional duty imposed under Article 140 shall be one third of the customs duty applicable to the given product in accordance with the Common Customs Tariff.
However, for imports benefiting from a tariff preference as to ad valorem duty the additional duty shall be one third of the specific duty on the product in so far as Article 140(2) applies.


Article 142

Exemptions from additional duty


1.   The following goods are exempt from the additional duty:






(a)


goods imported against the tariff quotas listed in Annex 7 to Council Regulation (EEC) No 2658/87 (19) (hereinafter referred to as ‘Combined Nomenclature’);










(b)


goods en route to the Union as defined in paragraph 2.






2.   Goods shall be considered to be en route to the Union if they:






(a)


left the country of origin before the decision to impose the additional duty; and










(b)


are being transported under cover of a transport document valid from the place of loading in the country of origin to the place of unloading in the Union, drawn up before imposition of the additional duty.






3.   Interested parties shall provide evidence to the satisfaction of the customs authorities that the requirements of paragraph 2 are met.
However, the customs authorities may deem that goods left their country of origin before the date of imposition of the additional duty if one of the following documents is provided:






(a)


for sea transport, the bill of lading showing that loading took place before that date;










(b)


for rail transport, the waybill accepted by the rail authorities of the country of origin before that date;










(c)


for road transport, the road carriage contract (CMR) or another transit document made out in the country of origin before that date, if the conditions laid down in bilateral or multilateral arrangements concluded in the context of Union transit or common transit are observed;










(d)


for air transport, the air way bill showing that the airline accepted the goods before that date.










TITLE V


GENERAL, TRANSITIONAL AND FINAL PROVISIONS



Article 143

Checks

Without prejudice to specific provisions of this Regulation or other Union legislation, Member States shall introduce checks and measures in so far as they are necessary to ensure the proper application of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 and this Regulation. They shall be effective, proportionate and dissuasive so that they provide adequate protection for the financial interests of the Union.
In particular, they shall ensure that:






(a)


all eligibility criteria established by Union or national legislation or the national framework or the national strategy can be checked;










(b)


the competent authorities of the Member State responsible for carrying out checks have a sufficient number of suitably qualified and experienced staff to carry out the checks effectively; and










(c)


provision is made for checks to avoid irregular duplicated financing of measures under this Regulation and other Union or national schemes.






Article 144

National sanctions

Without prejudice to any sanctions set out in this Regulation or Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, Member States shall provide for the application of sanctions at national level in relation to irregularities committed in respect of requirements set out in this Regulation and Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 which are effective, proportionate and dissuasive so that they provide adequate protection for the financial interests of the Union.


Article 145

Artificially created situations

Without prejudice to any specific measures set out in this Regulation or Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, no payment shall be made in favour of beneficiaries for whom it is established that they artificially created the conditions required for obtaining such payments with a view to obtaining an advantage contrary to the objectives of the support scheme concerned.


Article 146

Notifications


1.   Member States shall designate a single competent authority or body responsible for fulfilling the notification obligations with respect to each one of the following topics:






(a)


producer organisations, associations of producer organisations and producer groups, as provided for in Article 97 of this Regulation;










(b)


producer prices of fruit and vegetable in the internal market, as provided for in Article 98 of this Regulation;










(c)


prices and quantities of the products imported from third countries sold on the representative import markets, as provided for in Article 134 of this Regulation;










(d)


import volumes put into free circulation, as provided for in Article 139 of this Regulation.






2.   Member States shall notify the Commission of the designation and the contact details of the authority or body concerned, and every change of this information.
The list of the designated authorities or body containing their names and addresses shall be made available to the Member States and to the public by every appropriate means via the information systems put in place by the Commission, including publication on the Internet.


3.   Without prejudice to any specific provisions of this Regulation, all notifications to be made by Member States to the Commission under this Regulation shall be made by electronic means of the information system made available to the competent authorities or bodies of the Member States by the Commission and in the format specified by the Commission.
Notifications not made by the means and in the format referred to in the first subparagraph may be considered as not made at all, without prejudice to paragraph 5.


4.   Without prejudice to any specific provisions of this Regulation, Member States shall take all measures necessary to ensure that they are able to meet the deadlines for notifications set out in this Regulation.


5.   If a Member State fails to make a notification as required under this Regulation or Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 or if the notification appears incorrect in the light of objective facts in the Commission’s possession, the Commission may suspend part or all of the monthly payments referred to in Article 14 of Council Regulation (EC) No 1290/2005 (20) as regards the fruit and vegetables sectors until the notification is correctly made.



Article 147

Obvious errors

Any notification, claim or request made to a Member State under this Regulation or Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, including an aid application, may be adjusted at any time after its submission in cases of obvious errors recognised by the competent authority of the Member State.


Article 148

Force majeure and exceptional circumstances

Where, under this Regulation or Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, a sanction or penalty is to be imposed or a benefit or recognition is to be withdrawn, the sanction or penalty shall not be imposed or the withdrawal made in cases of force majeure or exceptional circumstances within the meaning of Article 31 of Regulation (EC) No 73/2009.
However, the case of force majeure shall be notified, with relevant evidence to the satisfaction of the competent authority of the Member State, to the authority within 10 working days of the date on which the person concerned is in a position to do so.


Article 149

Repeal

Regulation (EC) No 1580/2007 is repealed.
However, Article 134 of Regulation (EC) No 1580/2007 shall continue to apply until 31 August 2011.
References to the repealed Regulation shall be construed as references to this Regulation and shall, where appropriate, be read in accordance with the correlation table set out in Annex XIX.


Article 150

Transitional provisions


1.   Operational programmes which benefit from Article 203a(3)(a) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 may continue to run until their end provided they comply with the rules applicable prior to 1 January 2008.


2.   For the purposes of Article 203a(6) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, the rules on the minimum characteristics of the raw material supplied for processing and minimum quality requirements for finished products which shall remain applicable in respect of the raw materials harvested in the territory of Member States which make use of the transitional arrangement referred to in that paragraph shall be, in addition to any relevant marketing standards referred to in Title II of this Regulation, those contained in the Commission Regulations listed in Annex XX.


3.   Recognition plans accepted under Regulation (EC) No 2200/96 which continue to benefit from acceptance pursuant to Article 203a(4) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 for producer groups not in Member States which acceded to the European Union on 1 May 2004 or after that date and not in the outermost regions of the Union as referred to in Article 349 of the Treaty or in the smaller Aegean Islands as referred to in Article 1(2) of Council Regulation (EC) No 1405/2006 (21) shall be financed at the rates set out in Article 103a(3)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.
Recognition plans accepted under Regulation (EC) No 2200/96 which benefited from Article 14(7) of that Regulation and continue to benefit from acceptance pursuant to Article 203a(4) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 shall be financed at the rates set out in Article 103a(3)(a) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.


4.   Member States shall modify their national strategies by 15 September 2011 at the latest if necessary in order to:






(a)


duly justify what distance shall be considered as significant as referred to in Article 50(7)(b);










(b)


set out a maximum percentage of the annual expenditure under an operational programme to be spent on actions related to the environmental management on packaging as referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 60(4).






5.   Operational programmes that were approved before the date of entry into force of this Regulation may continue to run until their end without fulfilling the maximum percentage provided for by the second subparagraph of Article 60(4).



Article 151

Entry into force

This Regulation shall enter into force on the seventh day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.





This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
Done at Brussels, 7 June 2011.


For the Commission


The President

José Manuel BARROSO
            





(1)  
            OJ L 299, 16.11.2007, p. 1.

(2)  
            OJ L 350, 31.12.2007, p. 1.

(3)  
            OJ L 297, 21.11.1996, p. 1.

(4)  
            OJ L 297, 21.11.1996, p. 29.

(5)  
            OJ L 297, 21.11.1996, p. 46.

(6)  
            OJ L 273, 17.10.2007, p. 1.

(7)  
            OJ L 144, 4.6.1997, p. 19.

(8)  
            OJ L 41, 14.2.2003, p. 33.

(9)  
            OJ L 277, 21.10.2005, p. 1.

(10)  
            OJ L 368, 23.12.2006, p. 15.

(11)  
            OJ L 365, 31.12.1994, p. 10.

(12)  
            OJ L 205, 3.8.1985, p. 5.

(13)  
            OJ L 358, 16.12.2006, p. 3.

(14)  
            OJ L 171, 23.6.2006, p. 1.

(15)  
            OJ L 30, 31.1.2009, p. 16.

(16)  
            OJ L 355, 15.12.2006, p. 56.

(17)  
            OJ L 302, 19.10.1992, p. 1.

(18)  
            OJ L 253, 11.10.1993, p. 1.

(19)  
            OJ L 256, 7.9.1987, p. 1.

(20)  
            OJ L 209, 11.8.2005, p. 1.

(21)  
            OJ L 265, 26.9.2006, p. 1.




ANNEX I

MARKETING STANDARDS REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 3

PART A

General marketing standard

1.   Minimum quality requirements

Subject to the tolerances allowed, the products shall be:






—


intact,










—


sound; products affected by rotting or deterioration such as to make them unfit for consumption are excluded,










—


clean, practically free of any visible foreign matter,










—


practically free from pests,










—


practically free from damage caused by pests affecting the flesh,










—


free of abnormal external moisture,










—


free of any foreign smell and/or taste.




The condition of the products must be such as to enable them:






—


to withstand transport and handling,










—


to arrive in satisfactory condition at the place of destination.




2.   Minimum maturity requirements

The products must be sufficiently developed, but not over-developed, and fruit must display satisfactory ripeness and must not be overripe.
The development and state of maturity of the products must be such as to enable them to continue their ripening process and to reach a satisfactory degree of ripeness.
3.   Tolerance

A tolerance of 10 % by number or weight of product not satisfying the minimum quality requirements shall be permitted in each lot. Within this tolerance not more than 2 per cent in total may consist of produce affected by decay.
4.   Marking of origin of produce

Full name of the country of origin (1). For products originating in a Member State this shall be in the language of the country of origin or any other language understandable by the consumers of the country of destination. For other products, this shall be in any language understandable by the consumers of the country of destination.
PART B

Specific marketing standards

PART 1:   MARKETING STANDARD FOR APPLES

I.   DEFINITION OF PRODUCE

This standard applies to apples of varieties (cultivars) grown from Malus domestica Borkh., to be supplied fresh to the consumer, apples for industrial processing being excluded.
II.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING QUALITY

The purpose of the standard is to define the quality requirements for apples, after preparation and packaging.
A.   Minimum requirements

In all classes, subject to the special provisions for each class and the tolerances allowed, apples must be:






—


intact,










—


sound; produce affected by rotting or deterioration such as to make it unfit for consumption is excluded,










—


clean, practically free of any visible foreign matter,










—


practically free from pests,










—


free from damage caused by pests affecting the flesh,










—


free from serious watercore, with the exception of Fuji and their mutants,










—


free of abnormal external moisture,










—


free of any foreign smell and/or taste.




The development and condition of the apples must be such as to enable them:






—


to withstand transportation and handling, and










—


to arrive in satisfactory condition at the place of destination.




B.   Maturity requirements

The apples must be sufficiently developed, and display satisfactory ripeness.
The development and state of maturity of the apples must be such as to enable them to continue their ripening process and to reach the degree of ripeness required in relation to the varietal characteristics.
In order to verify the minimum maturity requirements, several parameters may be considered (e.g. morphological aspect, taste, firmness and refractometric index).
C.   Classification

Apples are classified in three classes defined below.
(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

Apples in this class must be of superior quality. They must be characteristic of the variety (2) and with the stalk which must be intact.
Apples must express the following minimum surface colour characteristic of the variety:






—


3/4 of total surface red coloured in case of colour group A,










—


1/2 of total surface mixed red coloured in case of colour group B,










—


1/3 of total surface slightly red coloured, blushed or striped in case of colour group C.




The flesh must be perfectly sound.
They must be free from defects with the exception of very slight superficial defects provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package:






—


very slight skin defects,










—


very slight russeting (3) such as:






—


brown patches that may not go outside the stem cavity and may not be rough and/or










—


slight isolated traces of russeting.








(ii)   Class I

Apples in this class must be of good quality. They must be characteristic of the variety (4).
Apples must express the following minimum surface colour characteristic of the variety:






—


1/2 of total surface red coloured in case of colour group A,










—


1/3 of total surface mixed red coloured in case of colour group B,










—


1/10 of total surface slightly red coloured, blushed or striped in case of colour group C.




The flesh must be perfectly sound.
The following slight defects, however, may be allowed, provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package:






—


a slight defect in shape,










—


a slight defect in development,










—


a slight defect in colouring,










—


slight bruising not exceeding 1 cm2 of total surface area and not discoloured,










—


slight skin defects which must not extend over more than:






—


2 cm in length for defects of elongated shape,










—


1 cm2 of total surface area for other defects, with the exception of scab (Venturia inaequalis), which must not extend over more than 0,25 cm2, cumulative, in area,














—


slight russeting (5) such as:






—


brown patches that may go slightly beyond the stem or pistil cavities but may not be rough and/or










—


thin net-like russeting not exceeding 1/5 of the total fruit surface and not contrasting strongly with the general colouring of the fruit and/or










—


dense russeting not exceeding 1/20 of the total fruit surface, while thin net-like russeting and dense russeting taken together may not exceed a maximum of 1/5 of the total surface of the fruit.




The stalk may be missing, provided the break is clean and the adjacent skin is not damaged.




(iii)   Class II

This class includes apples which do not qualify for inclusion in the higher classes but satisfy the minimum requirements specified above.
The flesh must be free from major defects.
The following defects may be allowed, provided the apples retain their essential characteristics as regards the quality, the keeping quality and presentation:






—


defects in shape,










—


defects in development,










—


defects in colouring,










—


slight bruising not exceeding 1,5 cm2 in area which may be slightly discoloured,










—


skin defects which must not extend over more than:






—


4 cm in length for defects of elongated shape,










—


2,5 cm2 of total surface area for other defects, with the exception of scab (Venturia inaequalis), which must not extend over more than 1 cm2, cumulative, in area;














—


slight russeting (6) such as






—


brown patches that may go beyond the stem or pistil cavities and may be slightly rough and/or










—


thin net-like russeting not exceeding 1/2 of the total fruit surface and not contrasting strongly with the general colouring of the fruit and/or










—


dense russeting not exceeding 1/3 of the total fruit surface while










—


thin net-like russeting and dense russeting taken together may not exceed a maximum of 1/2 of the total surface of the fruit.








III.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING SIZING

Size is determined either by the maximum diameter of the equatorial section or by weight.
The minimum size shall be 60 mm, if measured by diameter or 90 g, if measured by weight. Fruit of smaller sizes may be accepted, if the Brix level of the produce is equal to or greater than to 10,5° Brix and the size is not smaller than 50 mm or 70 g.
To ensure the uniformity in size, the range in size between produce in the same package shall not exceed:






(a)


for fruit sized by diameter:






—


5 mm for ‘Extra’ Class fruit and for Classes I and II fruit packed in rows and layers. However, for apples of the varieties Bramley's Seedling (Bramley, Triomphe de Kiel) and Horneburger, the difference in diameter may amount to 10 mm, and










—


10 mm for Class I fruit packed loose in the package or sales packages. However, for apples of the varieties Bramley's Seedling (Bramley, Triomphe de Kiel) and Horneburger, the difference in diameter may amount to 20 mm, or














(b)


for fruit sized by weight:






—


For ‘Extra’ Class and Classes I and II apples packed in rows and layers:






Range (g)


Weight difference (g)




70-90


15  g




91-135


20  g




136-200


30  g




201-300


40  g




> 300


50  g














—


For Class I fruit packed loose in the package or in sales packages:






Range (g)


Uniformity (g)




70-135


35 




136-300


70 




> 300


100 








There is no sizing uniformity requirement for Class II fruit packed loose in the package or in sales packages.




IV.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING TOLERANCES

At all marketing stages, tolerances in respect of quality and size shall be allowed in each lot for produce not satisfying the requirements of the class indicated.
A.   Quality tolerances

(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

A total tolerance of 5 per cent, by number or weight, of apples not satisfying the requirements of the class, but meeting those of Class I is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 0,5 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying the requirements of Class II quality.
(ii)   Class I

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of apples not satisfying the requirements of the class, but meeting those of Class II is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 1 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying neither the requirements of Class II quality nor the minimum requirements, or of produce affected by decay.
(iii)   Class II

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of apples satisfying neither the requirements of the class nor the minimum requirements is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 2 per cent in total may consist of produce affected by decay.
B.   Size tolerances

For all classes: a total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of apples not satisfying the requirements as regards sizing is allowed. This tolerance may not be extended to include produce with a size:






—


5 mm or more below the minimum diameter,










—


10 g or more below the minimum weight.




V.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING PRESENTATION

A.   Uniformity

The contents of each package must be uniform and contain only apples of the same origin, variety, quality and size (if sized) and the same degree of ripeness.
In the case of the ‘Extra’ Class, uniformity also applies to colouring.
However, a mixture of apples of distinctly different varieties may be packed together in a sales package provided they are uniform in quality and, for each variety concerned, in origin.
The visible part of the contents of the package must be representative of the entire contents.
B.   Packaging

The apples must be packed in such a way as to protect the produce properly. In particular, sales packages of a net weight exceeding 3 kg shall be sufficiently rigid to ensure proper protection of the produce.
The materials used inside the package must be clean and of a quality such as to avoid causing any external or internal damage to the produce. The use of materials, particularly of paper or stamps bearing trade specifications is allowed provided the printing or labelling has been done with non-toxic ink or glue.
Stickers individually affixed on the produce shall be such that, when removed, they neither leave visible traces of glue, nor lead to skin defects.
Packages must be free of all foreign matter.
VI.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING MARKING

Each package must bear the following particulars, in letters grouped on the same side, legibly and indelibly marked, and visible from the outside.
A.   Identification

The name and the address of the packer and/or the dispatcher.
This mention may be replaced:






—


for all packages with the exception of pre-packages, by the officially issued or accepted code mark representing the packer and/or the dispatcher, indicated in close connection with the reference ‘Packer and/or Dispatcher’ (or equivalent abbreviations);










—


for pre-packages only, by the name and the address of a seller established within the Union indicated in close connection with the mention ‘Packed for:’ or an equivalent mention. In this case, the labelling shall also include a code representing the packer and/or the dispatcher. The seller shall give all information deemed necessary by the inspection body as to the meaning of this code.




B.   Nature of produce







—



                              ‘Apples’ if the contents are not visible from the outside










—


Name of the variety. In the case of a mixture of apples of distinctly different varieties, names of the different varieties.










—


The name of the variety can be replaced by a synonym. The name of the mutant or a trade name can only be given in addition to the variety or the synonym.




C.   Origin of produce

Country of origin (7) and, optionally, district where grown, or national, regional or local place name.
In the case of a mixture of distinctly different varieties of apples of different origins, the indication of each country of origin shall appear next to the name of the variety concerned.
D.   Commercial specifications







—


Class










—


Size, or for fruit packed in rows and layers, number of units.




If identification is by the size, this should be expressed:






(a)


for produce subject to the uniformity rules, as minimum and maximum diameters or minimum and maximum weight;










(b)


for produce not subject to the uniformity rules, as the diameter or the weight of the smallest fruit in the package followed by ‘and over’ or equivalent denomination or, if appropriate, followed by the diameter or weight of the largest fruit in the package.




E.   Official control mark (optional)

Packages need not to bear the particulars mentioned in the first subparagraph, when they contain sales packages, clearly visible from the outside, and all bearing these particulars. These packages shall be free from any indications such as could mislead. When these packages are palletised, the particulars shall be given on a notice placed in an obvious position on at least two sides of the pallet.


Appendix

Non-exhaustive list of apple varieties

Fruits of varieties that are not part of the list must be graded according to their varietal characteristics.









Varieties


Mutant


Synonyms


Colour group


Russeting




African Red


 


 


B


 




Akane


 


Tohoku 3


B


 




Alborz Seedling


 


 


C


 




Aldas


 


 


B


 




Alice


 


 


B


 




Alkmene


 


Early Windsor


C


 




Alro


 


 


B


 




Alwa


 


 


B


 




Amasya


 


 


B


 




Angold


 


 


C


 




Antej


 


Antei


B


 




Apollo


 


Beauty of Blackmoor


C


 




Arkcharm


 


Arkansas No 18, A 18


C


 




Arlet


 


 


B


R




Aroma


 


 


C


 




Mutants of Aroma e.g


 


C


 




Amorosa


 


C


 




Auksis


 


 


B


 




Beacon


 


 


A


 




Belfort


 


Pella


B


 




Belle de Boskoop


 


 


 


R




Mutants of Belle de Boskoop e.g


 


 


R




Boskoop rouge


Red Boskoop
Roter
Boskoop


 


R




Belle fleur double


 


 


 


 




Belorrusskoje
Maļinovoje


 


Belorusskoe Malinovoe, Byelorusskoe Malinovoe


B


 




Berlepsch


 


Freiherr von Berlepsch


C


 




Mutants of Berlepsch e.g.


 


C


 




Berlepsch rouge


Red Berlepsch, Roter Berlepsch


C


 




Blushed Golden


 


 


 


 




Bogatir


 


Bogatyr


 


 




Bohemia


 


 


B


 




Braeburn


 


 


B


 




Mutants of Braeburn e.g.


 


B


 




Hidala


 


B


 




Joburn


 


B


 




Lochbuie Red Braeburn


 


B


 




Mahana Red


 


B


 




Mariri Red


 


B


 




Redfield


 


B


 




Royal Braeburn


 


B


 




Bramley's Seedling


 


Bramley, Triomphe de Kiel


 


 




Brettacher Sämling


 


 


 


 




Calville Groupe des


 


 


 


 




Cardinal


 


 


B


 




Carola


 


Kalco


C


 




Caudle


 


 


B


 




Charden


 


 


 


 




Charles Ross


 


 


 


 




Civni


 


 


B


 




Coromandel Red


 


Corodel


A


 




Cortland


 


 


B


 




Cox's Orange Pippin


 


Cox orange


C


R




Mutants of Cox's Orange Pippin e.g.


 


C


R




Cherry Cox


 


C


R




Crimson Bramley


 


 


 


 




Cripps Pink


 


 


C


 




Mutants of Cripps Pink e.g.


 


C


 




Pink Rose


 


C


 




Rosy Glow


 


C


 




Ruby Pink


 


C


 




Cripps Red


 


 


C* (8)



 




Dalinbel


 


 


B


R




Delblush


 


 


 


 




Delcorf


 


 


C


 




Mutants of Delcorf e.g.


 


C


 




Dalili


 


C


 




Monidel


 


C


 




Delgollune


 


 


B


 




Delicious ordinaire


 


Ordinary Delicious


B


 




Deljeni


 


 


 


 




Delikates


 


 


B


 




Delor


 


 


C


 




Discovery


 


 


C


 




Doč Melbi


 


Doch Melbi


C


 




Dunn's Seedling


 


 


 


R




Dykmanns Zoet


 


 


C


 




Egremont Russet


 


 


 


R




Elan


 


 


 


 




Elise


 


Red Delight


A


 




Ellison's orange


 


Ellison


C


 




Elstar


 


 


C


 




Mutants of Elstar e.g.


 


 


 




Bel-El


 


C


 




Daliest


 


C


 




Daliter


 


C


 




Elshof


 


C


 




Elstar Armhold


 


C


 




Elstar Reinhardt


 


C


 




Goedhof


 


C


 




Red Elstar


 


C


 




Valstar


 


C


 




Empire


 


 


A


 




Falstaff


 


 


C


 




Fiesta


 


Red Pippin


C


 




Florina


 


 


B


 




Forele


 


 


B


 




Fortune


 


 


 


R




Fuji


 


 


B


 




Mutants of Fuji e.g.


 


B


 




Kiku


 


B


 




Gala


 


 


C


 




Mutants of Gala e.g.


 


C


 




Annaglo


 


C


 




Baigent


 


C


 




Galaxy


 


C


 




Mitchgala


 


C


 




Obrogala


 


C


 




Regala


 


C


 




Regal Prince


 


C


 




Tenroy


 


C


 




Garcia


 


 


 


 




Ginger Gold


 


 


 


 




Gloster


 


 


B


 




Goldbohemia


 


 


 


 




Golden Delicious


 


 


 


 




Mutants of Golden Delicious e.g.


 


 


 




Golden Russet


 


 


 


R




Golden Supreme


 


Gradigold, Golden Extreme


 


 




Goldrush


 


Coop 38


 


 




Goldstar


 


 


 


 




Granny Smith


 


 


 


 




Gravensteiner


 


Gravenstein


 


 




Mutants of Gravensteiner e.g.


 


 


 




Gravenstein rouge


Red Gravenstein, Roter Gravensteiner


 


 




Greensleeves


 


 


 


 




Holsteiner Cox


 


Holstein


 


R




Mutants of Holsteiner Cox e.g.


 


 


R




Holstein rouge


Red Holstein, Roter Holsteiner Cox


 


R




Honeycrisp


 


 


C


 




Honey gold


 


 


 


 




Horneburger


 


 


 


 




Howgate Wonder


 


Manga


 


 




Idared


 


 


B


 




Iedzēnu


 


 


B


 




Ilga


 


 


B


 




Ingrid Marie


 


 


B


R




Iron


 


 


C


 




Isbranica


 


 


C


 




Jacob Fisher


 


 


 


 




Jacques Lebel


 


 


 


 




Jamba


 


 


C


 




James Grieve


 


 


 


 




Mutants of James Grieve e.g.


 


 


 




James Grieve rouge


Red James Grieve


 


 




Jarka


 


 


C


 




Jerseymac


 


 


B


 




Jester


 


 


 


 




Jonagold (9)



 


 


C


 




Mutants of Jonagold e.g.


 


C


 




Crowngold


 


C


 




Daligo


 


C


 




Daliguy


Jonasty


C


 




Dalijean


Jonamel


C


 




Decosta


 


C


 




Jomar


 


C


 




Jomured


Van de Poel


C


 




Jonabel


 


C


 




Jonabres


 


C


 




Jonagold Boerekamp


 


C


 




Jonagold 2000


Excel


C


 




Jonagored Supra


 


C


 




Jonaveld


 


C


 




King Jonagold


 


C


 




New Jonagold


Fukushima


C


 




Novajo


Veulemanns


C


 




Primo


 


C


 




Red Jonaprince


 


C


 




Romagold


Surkijn


C


 




Rubinstar


 


C


 




Schneica


Jonica


C


 




Wilmuta


 


C


 




Jonalord


 


 


C


 




Jonathan


 


 


B


 




Julia


 


 


B


 




Jupiter


 


 


 


 




Karmijn de Sonnaville


 


 


C


 




Katja


 


Katy


B


 




Kent


 


 


 


R




Kidd's orange red


 


 


C


R




Kim


 


 


B


 




Koit


 


 


C


 




Koričnoje
Novoje


 


Korichnoe Novoe, Korichnevoe Novoe


C


 




Kovaļenkovskoje


 


Kovalenkovskoe


B


 




Krameri Tuvioun


 


 


B


 




Kulikovskoje


 


 


B


 




Lady Williams


 


 


B


 




Lane's Prince Albert


 


 


 


 




Laxton's Superb


 


 


C


R




Ligol


 


 


B


 




Lobo


 


 


B


 




Lodel


 


 


A


 




Lord Lambourne


 


 


C


 




Maigold


 


 


B


 




McIntosh


 


 


B


 




Meelis


 


 


B


 




Melba


 


 


C


 




Melodie


 


 


B


 




Melrose


 


 


C


 




Meridian


 


 


C


 




Moonglo


 


 


C


 




Morgenduft


 


Imperatore


B


 




Mutsu


 


 


 


 




Noris


 


 


B


 




Normanda


 


 


C


 




Nueva Europa


 


 


C


 




Nueva Orleans


 


 


B


 




Odin


 


 


B


 




Ontario


 


 


B


 




Orlik


 


 


B


 




Orlovskoje Polosatoje


 


 


C


 




Ozark Gold


 


 


 


 




Paula Red


 


 


B


 




Pero de Cirio


 


 


 


 




Piglos


 


 


B


 




Pikant


 


 


B


 




Pikkolo


 


 


C


 




Pilot


 


 


C


 




Pimona


 


 


C


 




Pinova


 


 


C


 




Pirella


 


 


B


 




Piros


 


 


C


 




Prima


 


 


B


 




Rafzubex


 


 


A


 




Rafzubin


 


 


C


 




Rajka


 


 


B


 




Rambour d'hiver


 


 


 


 




Rambour Franc


 


 


B


 




Reanda


 


 


B


 




Rebella


 


 


C


 




Red Delicious


 


 


A


 




Mutants of Red Delicious e.g.


 


A


 




Erovan


Early Red
One


A


 




Fortuna Delicious


 


A


 




Oregon


Oregon Spur Delicious


A


 




Otago


 


A


 




Red Chief


 


A


 




Red King


 


A


 




Red Spur


 


A


 




Red York


 


A


 




Richared


 


A


 




Royal Red


 


A


 




Shotwell Delicious


 


A


 




Stark Delicious


 


A


 




Starking


 


A


 




Starkrimson


 


A


 




Starkspur


 


A


 




Topred


 


A


 




Well Spur


 


A


 




Red Dougherty


 


 


A


 




Redkroft


 


 


A


 




Regal


 


 


A


 




Regina


 


 


B


 




Reglindis


 


 


C


 




Reine des Reinettes


 


Gold Parmoné, Goldparmäne


C


 




Reineta Encarnada


 


 


B


 




Reinette Rouge du Canada


 


 


B


 




Reinette d'Orléans


 


 


 


 




Reinette Blanche du Canada


 


Reinette du Canada, Canada Blanc, Kanadarenette, Renetta del Canada


 


R




Reinette de France


 


 


 


 




Reinette de Landsberg


 


 


 


 




Reinette grise du Canada


 


Graue Kanadarenette


 


R




Relinda


 


 


C


 




Remo


 


 


B


 




Renora


 


 


B


 




Resi


 


 


B


 




Resista


 


 


 


 




Retina


 


 


B


 




Rewena


 


 


B


 




Roja de Benejama


 


Verruga, Roja del Valle, Clavelina


A


 




Rome Beauty


 


Belle de Rome, Rome


B


 




Mutants of Rome Beauty e.g.


 


B


 




Red Rome


 


B


 




Rosana


 


 


B


 




Royal Beauty


 


 


A


 




Rubin (Czech cultivar)


 


 


C


 




Rubin (Kazahstan cultivar)


 


 


B


 




Rubinola


 


 


B


 




Rudens Svītrainais


 


Osennee Polosatoe, Rudeninis Dryzuotasis, Rudens Svītrotais, Streifling, Streifling Herbst, Sügisjoonik, Syysjuovikas and numerous others


C


 




Saltanat


 


 


B


 




Sciearly


 


 


A


 




Scifresh


 


 


B


 




Sciglo


 


 


A


 




Sciray


 


GS48


A


 




Scired


 


 


A


R




Sciros


 


 


A


 




Selena


 


 


B


 




Shampion


 


 


B


 




Sidrunkollane Talioun


 


 


 


 




Sinap Orlovskij


 


 


 


 




Snygold


 


Earlygold


 


 




Sommerregent


 


 


C


 




Spartan


 


 


A


 




Splendour


 


 


A


 




St. Edmunds Pippin


 


 


 


R




Stark's Earliest


 


 


C


 




Štaris


 


Staris


A


 




Sturmer Pippin


 


 


 


R




Summerred


 


 


B


 




Sügisdessert


 


 


C


 




Sunrise


 


 


A


 




Sunset


 


 


 


R




Suntan


 


 


 


R




Sweet Caroline


 


 


C


 




Talvenauding


 


 


B


R




Tellisaare


 


 


B


 




Tiina


 


Tina


C


 




Topaz


 


 


B


 




Tydeman's Early Worcester


 


Tydeman's Early


B


 




Veteran


 


 


B


 




Vista Bella


 


Bellavista


B


 




Wealthy


 


 


B


 




Worcester Pearmain


 


 


B


 




York


 


 


B


 




Zarja Alatau


 


Zarya Alatau


 


 




Zailijskoje


 


Zailiyskoe


B


 




Žigulovskoje


 


Zhigulovskoe


C


 






PART 2:   MARKETING STANDARD FOR CITRUS FRUIT

I.   DEFINITION OF PRODUCE

This standard applies to the following varieties (cultivars) of fruit, classified as ‘citrus fruit’, to be supplied fresh to the consumer, citrus fruit for industrial processing being excluded:






—


lemons grown from the species Citrus limon (L.) Burm. f.,










—


mandarins (Citrus reticulata Blanco), including satsumas (Citrus unshiu Marcow), clementines (Citrus clementina hort. ex Tanaka), common mandarins (Citrus deliciosa Ten.) and tangerines (Citrus tangerina Tan.) grown from these species and hybrids thereof,










—


oranges grown from the species Citrus sinensis (L.) Osbeck.




II.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING QUALITY

The purpose of the standard is to define the quality requirements for citrus fruit after preparation and packaging.
A.   Minimum requirements

In all classes, subject to the special provisions for each class and the tolerances allowed, the citrus fruit must be:






—


intact,










—


free of bruising and/or extensive healed overcuts,










—


sound; produce affected by rotting or deterioration such as to make it unfit for consumption is excluded,










—


clean, practically free of any visible foreign matter,










—


practically free from pests,










—


free from damage caused by pests affecting the flesh,










—


free of signs of shrivelling and dehydration,










—


free of damage caused by low temperature or frost,










—


free of abnormal external moisture,










—


free of any foreign smell and/or taste.




The development and condition of the citrus fruit must be such as to enable it:






—


to withstand transportation and handling, and










—


to arrive in satisfactory condition at the place of destination.




B.   Maturity requirements

The citrus fruit must have reached an appropriate degree of development and ripeness, account being taken of criteria proper to the variety, the time of picking and the growing area.
Maturity of citrus fruit is defined by the following parameters specified for each species below:






—


minimum juice content,










—


minimum total soluble solids content, i.e. minimum sugar content,










—


minimum sugar/acid ratio (10),










—


colouring.




The degree of colouring shall be such that following normal development the citrus fruit reach the colour typical of the variety at their destination point.









 


Minimum juice content
(per cent)


Minimum sugar content
(°Brix)


Minimum sugar/acid ratio


Colouring




Lemons


20 


 


 


Must be typical of the variety. Fruit with a green (but not dark green) colour is allowed, provided it satisfies the minimum requirements as to juice content




Satsumas, clementines, other mandarin varieties and their hybrids





Satsumas


33 


 


6,5:1


Must be typical of the variety on at least one third of the surface of the fruit




Clementines


40 


 


7,0:1




Other mandarin varieties and their hybrids


33 


 


7,5:1


 




Oranges





Blood oranges


30 


 


6,5:1


Must be typical of the variety. However, fruit with light green colour not exceeding one fifth of the total surface area of the fruit is allowed, provided it satisfies the minimum requirements as to juice content.
Oranges produced in areas with high temperatures and high relative humidity conditions during the developing period having a green colour exceeding one fifth of the surface area of the fruit are allowed, provided they satisfy the minimum requirements as to juice content.




Navels group


33 


 


6,5:1




Other varieties


35 


 


6,5:1




Mosambi, Sathgudi and Pacitan with more than one fifth green colour


33 


 


 




Other varieties with more than one fifth green colour


45 


 


 




Citrus fruit meeting these maturity requirements may be ‘degreened’. This treatment is only permitted if the other natural organoleptic characteristics are not modified.
C.   Classification

Citrus fruit is classified in three classes, as defined below:
(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

Citrus fruit in this class must be of superior quality. It must be characteristic of the variety and/or commercial type.
It must be free from defects, with the exception of very slight superficial defects, provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package.
(ii)   Class I

Citrus fruit in this class must be of good quality. It must be characteristic of the variety and/or commercial type.
The following slight defects, however, may be allowed provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package:






—


a slight defect in shape,










—


slight defects in colouring, including slight sunburn,










—


slight progressive skin defects, provided they do not affect the flesh,










—


slight skin defects occurring during the formation of the fruit, such as silver scurfs, russets or pest damage,










—


slight healed defects due to a mechanical cause such as hail damage, rubbing or damage from handling,










—


slight and partial detachment of the peel (or rind) for all fruit of the mandarin group.




(iii)   Class II

This class includes citrus fruit which does not qualify for inclusion in the higher classes but satisfies the minimum requirements specified above.
The following defects may be allowed, provided the citrus fruit retains its essential characteristics as regards the quality, the keeping quality and presentation:






—


defects in shape,










—


defects in colouring, including sunburn,










—


progressive skin defects, provided they do not affect the flesh,










—


skin defects occurring during the formation of the fruit, such as silver scurfs, russets or pest damage,










—


healed defects due to a mechanical cause such as hail damage, rubbing or damage from handling,










—


superficial healed skin alterations,










—


rough skin,










—


a slight and partial detachment of the peel (or rind) for oranges and a partial detachment of the peel (or rind) for all fruit of the mandarin group.




III.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING SIZING

Size is determined by the maximum diameter of the equatorial section of the fruit or by count.
A.   Minimum size

The following minimum sizes apply:






Fruit


Diameter (mm)




Lemons


45 




Satsumas, other mandarin varieties and hybrids


45 




Clementines


35 




Oranges


53 




B.   Uniformity

Citrus fruit may be sized by one of the following options:






(a)


To ensure uniformity in size, the range in size between produce in the same package shall not exceed:






—


10 mm, if the diameter of the smallest fruit (as indicated on the package) is < 60 mm










—


15 mm, if the diameter of the smallest fruit (as indicated on the package) is ≥ 60 mm but < 80 mm










—


20 mm, if the diameter of the smallest fruit (as indicated on the package) is ≥ 80 mm but < 110 mm










—


there is no limitation of difference in diameter for fruit ≥ 110 mm.














(b)


When size codes are applied, the codes and ranges in the following tables must be respected:







 


Size code


Diameter (mm)




Lemons


0


79-90




1


72-83




2


68-78




3


63-72




4


58-67




5


53-62




6


48-57




7


45-52




Satsumas, clementines, and other mandarin varieties and hybrids


1 - XXX


78 and above




1 - XX


67-78




1 or 1 - X


63-74




2


58-69




3


54-64




4


50-60




5


46-56




6 (11)



43-52




7


41-48




8


39-46




9


37-44




10


35-42




Oranges


0


92–110




1


87–100




2


84–96




3


81–92




4


77–88




5


73–84




6


70–80




7


67–76




8


64–73




9


62–70




10


60–68




11


58–66




12


56–63




13


53–60




Uniformity in size is achieved by the above-mentioned size scales, unless otherwise stated as follows:
For fruit in bulk bins and fruit in sales packages of a maximum net weight of 5 kg, the maximum difference must not exceed the range obtained by grouping three consecutive sizes in the size scale.










(c)


For fruit sized by count, the difference in size should be consistent with (a).




IV.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING TOLERANCES

At all marketing stages, tolerances in respect of quality and size shall be allowed in each lot for produce not satisfying the requirements of the class indicated.
A.   Quality tolerances

(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

A total tolerance of 5 per cent, by number or weight, of citrus fruit not satisfying the requirements of the class, but meeting those of Class I is allowed. Within this tolerance, not more than 0,5 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying the requirements of Class II quality.
(ii)   Class I

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of citrus fruit not satisfying the requirements of the class, but meeting those of Class II is allowed. Within this tolerance, not more than 1 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying neither the requirements of Class II quality nor the minimum requirements, or of produce affected by decay.
(iii)   Class II

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of citrus fruit satisfying neither the requirements of the class nor the minimum requirements is allowed. Within this tolerance, not more than 2 per cent in total may consist of produce affected by decay.
B.   Size tolerances

For all classes: a total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of citrus fruit corresponding to the size immediately below and/or above that (or those, in the case of the combination of three sizes) mentioned on the packages is allowed.
In any case, the tolerance of 10 % applies only to fruit not smaller than the following minima:






Fruit


Diameter (mm)




Lemons


43 




Satsumas, other mandarin varieties and hybrids


43 




Clementines


34 




Oranges


50 




V.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING PRESENTATION

A.   Uniformity

The contents of each package must be uniform and contain only citrus fruit of the same origin, variety or commercial type, quality and size, and appreciably of the same degree of ripeness and development.
In addition, for the ‘Extra’ Class, uniformity in colouring is required.
However, a mixture of citrus fruit of distinctly different species may be packed together in a sales package, provided they are uniform in quality and, for each species concerned, in variety or commercial type and origin.
The visible part of the contents of the package must be representative of the entire contents.
B.   Packaging

The citrus fruit must be packed in such a way as to protect the produce properly.
The materials used inside the package must be clean and of a quality such as to avoid causing any external or internal damage to the produce. The use of materials, particularly of paper or stamps bearing trade specifications is allowed provided the printing or labelling has been done with non-toxic ink or glue.
Stickers individually affixed on the produce shall be such that, when removed, they neither leave visible traces of glue, nor lead to skin defects.
If the fruit is wrapped, thin, dry, new and odourless (12) paper must be used.
The use of any substance tending to modify the natural characteristics of the citrus fruit, especially its taste or smell (13), is prohibited.
Packages must be free of all foreign matter. However, a presentation where a short (not wooden) twig with some green leaves adheres to the fruit is allowed.
VI.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING MARKING

Each package must bear the following particulars, in letters grouped on the same side, legibly and indelibly marked, and visible from the outside.
A.   Identification

The name and the address of the packer and/or the dispatcher.
This mention may be replaced:






—


for all packages with the exception of pre-packages, by the officially issued or accepted code mark representing the packer and/or the dispatcher, indicated in close connection with the reference ‘Packer and/or Dispatcher’ (or equivalent abbreviations);










—


for pre-packages only, by the name and the address of a seller established within the Union indicated in close connection with the mention ‘Packed for:’ or an equivalent mention. In this case, the labelling shall also include a code representing the packer and/or the dispatcher. The seller shall give all information deemed necessary by the inspection body as to the meaning of this code.




B.   Nature of produce







—


Common name of the species if the produce is not visible from the outside.










—


Name of the variety, for oranges.










—


For the mandarins’ group:






—


Satsumas: ‘Satsumas’, which may be followed by the variety










—


Clementines: ‘Clementines’, which may be followed by the variety and, where appropriate, by either the indication ‘seedless’ for seedless clementines (no seeds), clementines (1 to 10 seeds), or clementines ‘with seeds’ for clementines with more than 10 seeds










—


Other mandarins and their hybrids: name of the variety.














—



                              ‘Mixture of citrus fruit’ or equivalent denomination and common names of the different species, in case of a mixture of citrus fruit of distinctly different species.










—



                              ‘Seedless’ (optional) (14).




C.   Origin of produce







—


Country of origin (15) and, optionally, district where grown, or national, regional or local place name.










—


In the case of a mixture of citrus fruit of distinctly different species of different origins, the indication of each country of origin shall appear next to the name of the species concerned.




D.   Commercial specifications







—


Class.










—


Size expressed as:






—


Minimum and maximum sizes (in mm) or










—


Size code(s) followed, optionally, by a minimum or maximum size or Count.










—


When used, mention of the preserving agent or other chemical substances used at post-harvest stage.








E.   Official control mark (optional)

Packages need not to bear the particulars mentioned in the first subparagraph, when they contain sales packages, clearly visible from the outside, and all bearing these particulars. These packages shall be free from any indications such as could mislead. When these packages are palletised, the particulars shall be given on a notice placed in an obvious position on at least two sides of the pallet.
PART 3:   MARKETING STANDARD FOR KIWIFRUIT

I.   DEFINITION OF PRODUCE

This standard applies to kiwifruit (also known as Actinidia or kiwi) of varieties (cultivars) grown from Actinidia chinensis Planch. and Actinidia deliciosa (A. Chev.), C.F. Liang and A.R. Ferguson to be supplied fresh to the consumer, kiwifruit for industrial processing being excluded.
II.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING QUALITY

The purpose of the standard is to define the quality requirements for kiwifruit, after preparation and packaging.
A.   Minimum requirements

In all classes, subject to the special provisions for each class and the tolerances allowed, the kiwifruit must be:






—


intact (but free of peduncle),










—


sound; produce affected by rotting or deterioration such as to make it unfit for consumption is excluded,










—


clean, practically free of any visible foreign matter,










—


practically free from pests,










—


free from damage caused by pests affecting the flesh,










—


adequately firm; not soft, shrivelled or water-soaked,










—


well formed, double/multiple fruit being excluded,










—


free of abnormal external moisture,










—


free of any foreign smell and/or taste.




The development and condition of the kiwifruit must be such as to enable it:






—


to withstand transportation and handling, and










—


to arrive in satisfactory condition at the place of destination.




B.   Minimum maturity requirements

The kiwifruit must be sufficiently developed and display satisfactory ripeness.
In order to satisfy this requirement, the fruit at packing must have attained a degree of ripeness of at least 6,2° Brix or an average dry matter content of 15 %, which should lead to 9,5° Brix when entering the distribution chain.
C.   Classification

Kiwifruit is classified in three classes as defined below.
(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

Kiwifruit in this class must be of superior quality. It must be characteristics of the variety.
The fruit must be firm and the flesh must be perfectly sound.
It must be free from defects with the exception of very slight superficial defects, provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package.
The ratio of the minimum/maximum diameter of the fruit measured at the equatorial section must be 0,8 or greater.
(ii)   Class I

Kiwifruit in this class must be of good quality. It must be characteristic of the variety.
The fruit must be firm and the flesh must be perfectly sound.
The following slight defects, however, may be allowed provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package:






—


a slight defect in shape (but free of swelling or malformations),










—


slight defects in colouring,










—


slight skin defects, provided the total area affected does not exceed 1 cm2,










—


small ‘Hayward mark’ like longitudinal lines and without protuberance.




The ratio of the minimum/maximum diameter of the fruit measured at the equatorial section must be 0,7 or greater.
(iii)   Class II

This class includes kiwifruit that does not qualify for inclusion in the higher classes, but satisfies the minimum requirements specified above.
The fruit must be reasonably firm and the flesh should not show any serious defects.
The following defects may be allowed provided the kiwifruit retains its essential characteristics as regards the quality, the keeping quality and presentation:






—


defects in shape,










—


defects in colouring,










—


skin defects such as small healed cuts or scarred/grazed tissue, provided that the total area affected does not exceed 2 cm2,










—


several more pronounced ‘Hayward marks’ with a slight protuberance,










—


slight bruising.




III.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING SIZING

Size is determined by the weight of the fruit.
The minimum weight for ‘Extra’ Class is 90 g, for Class I is 70 g and for Class II is 65 g.
To ensure uniformity in size, the range in size between produce in the same package shall not exceed:






—


10 g for fruit of weight up to 85 g,










—


15 g for fruit weighing between 85 g and 120 g,










—


20 g for fruit weighing between 120 g and 150 g,










—


40 g for fruit weighing 150 g or more.




IV.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING TOLERANCES

At all marketing stages, tolerances in respect of quality and size shall be allowed in each lot for produce not satisfying the requirements of the class indicated.
A.   Quality tolerances

(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

A total tolerance of 5 per cent, by number or weight, of kiwifruit not satisfying the requirements of the class but meeting those of Class I is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 0,5 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying the requirements of Class II quality.
(ii)   Class I

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of kiwifruit not satisfying the requirements of the class but meeting those of Class II is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 1 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying neither the requirements of Class II quality nor the minimum requirements, or of produce affected by decay.
(iii)   Class II

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of kiwifruit satisfying neither the requirements of the class nor the minimum requirements is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 2 per cent in total may consist of produce affected by decay.
B.   Size tolerances

For all classes: a total tolerance of 10 %, by number or weight, of kiwifruit not satisfying the requirements as regards sizing is allowed.
However, the kiwifruit must not weigh less than 85 g in ‘Extra’ Class, 67 g in Class I and 62 g in Class II.
V.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING PRESENTATION

A.   Uniformity

The contents of each package must be uniform and contain only kiwifruit of the same origin, variety, quality and size.
The visible part of the contents of the package must be representative of the entire contents.
B.   Packaging

The kiwifruit must be packed in such a way as to protect the produce properly.
The materials used inside the package must be clean and of a quality such as to avoid causing any external or internal damage to the produce. The use of materials, particularly of paper or stamps, bearing trade specifications is allowed, provided the printing or labelling has been done with non-toxic ink or glue.
Stickers individually affixed to the produce shall be such that, when removed, they neither leave visible traces of glue, nor lead to skin defects.
Packages must be free of all foreign matter.
VI.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING MARKING

Each package must bear the following particulars, in letters grouped on the same side, legibly and indelibly marked, and visible from the outside:
A.   Identification

The name and the address of the packer and/or the dispatcher.
This mention may be replaced:






—


for all packages with the exception of pre-packages, by the officially issued or accepted code mark representing the packer and/or the dispatcher, indicated in close connection with the reference ‘Packer and/or Dispatcher’ (or equivalent abbreviations);










—


for pre-packages only, by the name and the address of a seller established within the Union indicated in close connection with the mention ‘Packed for:’ or an equivalent mention. In this case, the labelling shall also include a code representing the packer and/or the dispatcher. The seller shall give all information deemed necessary by the inspection body as to the meaning of this code.




B.   Nature of produce







—



                              ‘Kiwifruit’ and/or ‘Actinidia’, if the contents are not visible from the outside.










—


Name of the variety (optional).




C.   Origin of produce

Country of origin (16) and, optionally, district where grown, or national, regional or local place name.
D.   Commercial specifications







—


Class.










—


Size expressed by the minimum and maximum weight of the fruit.










—


Number of fruits (optional).




E.   Official control mark (optional)

Packages need not bear the particulars mentioned in the first subparagraph, when they contain sales packages, clearly visible from the outside, and all bearing these particulars. These packages shall be free from any indications such as could mislead. When these packages are palletised, the particulars shall be given on a notice placed in an obvious position on at least two sides of the pallet.
PART 4:   MARKETING STANDARD FOR LETTUCES, CURLED-LEAVED ENDIVES AND BROAD-LEAVED (BATAVIAN) ENDIVES

I.   DEFINITION OF PRODUCE

This standard applies to






—


lettuces of varieties (cultivars) grown from:






—



Lactuca sativa var. capitata L. (head lettuces including crisphead and ‘Iceberg’ type lettuces),










—



Lactuca sativa var. longifolia Lam. (cos or romaine lettuces),










—



Lactuca sativa var. crispa L. (leaf lettuces),














—


crosses of these varieties and










—


curled-leaved endives of varieties (cultivars) grown from Cichorium endivia var. crispum Lam. and










—


broad-leaved (Batavian) endives (escaroles) of varieties (cultivars) grown from Cichorium endivia var. latifolium Lam.




to be supplied fresh to the consumer.
This standard does not apply to produce for industrial processing, produce presented as individual leaves, lettuces with root ball or lettuces in pots.
II.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING QUALITY

The purpose of the standard is to define the quality requirements for produce, after preparation and packaging.
A.   Minimum requirements

In all classes, subject to the special provisions for each class and the tolerances allowed, the produce must be:






—


intact,










—


sound; produce affected by rotting or deterioration such as to make it unfit for consumption is excluded,










—


clean and trimmed, i.e. practically free from all earth or other growing medium and practically free of any visible foreign matter,










—


fresh in appearance,










—


practically free from pests,










—


practically free from damage caused by pests,










—


turgescent,










—


not running to seed,










—


free of abnormal external moisture,










—


free of any foreign smell and/or taste.




In the case of lettuce, a reddish discolouration, caused by low temperature during growth, is allowed, unless it seriously affects the appearance of the lettuce.
The roots must be cut close to the base of the outer leaves and the cut must be neat.
The produce must be of normal development. The development and condition of the produce must be such as to enable it:






—


to withstand transportation and handling, and










—


to arrive in a satisfactory condition at the place of destination.




B.   Classification

The produce is classified in two classes, as defined below:
(i)   Class I

Produce in this class must be of good quality. It must be characteristic of the variety and/or commercial type.
The produce must also be:






—


well formed,










—


firm, taking into account the cultivation methods and the type of produce,










—


free from damage or deterioration impairing edibility,










—


free from frost damage.




Head lettuces must have a single well-formed heart. However, in the case of head lettuces grown under protection, the heart may be small.
Cos lettuces must have a heart, which may be small.
The centre of curled-leaved endives and broad-leaved (Batavian) endives must be yellow in colour.
(ii)   Class II

This class includes produce which do not qualify for inclusion in Class I, but satisfy the minimum requirements specified above.
The produce must be:






—


reasonably well-formed,










—


free from damage and deterioration which may seriously impair edibility.




The following defects may be allowed provided the produce retains its essential characteristics as regards the quality, the keeping quality and presentation:






—


slight discolouration,










—


slight damage caused by pests.




Head lettuces must have a heart, which may be small. However, in the case of head lettuces grown under protection, absence of heart is permissible.
Cos lettuces may show no heart.
III.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING SIZING

Size is determined by the weight of one unit.
To ensure uniformity in size, the range in size between produce in the same package shall not exceed:
(a)   Lettuces






—


40 g when the lightest unit weighs less than 150 g per unit,










—


100 g when the lightest unit weighs between 150 g and 300 g per unit,










—


150 g when the lightest unit weighs between 300 g and 450 g per unit,










—


300 g when the lightest unit weighs more than 450 g per unit.




(b)   Curled-leaved and broad-leaved (Batavian) endives






—


300 g.




IV.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING TOLERANCES

At all marketing stages, tolerances in respect of quality and size shall be allowed in each lot for produce not satisfying the requirements of the class indicated.
A.   Quality tolerances

(i)   Class I

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number, of produce not satisfying the requirements of the class, but meeting those of Class II is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 1 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying neither the requirements of Class II quality nor the minimum requirements, or of produce affected by decay.
(ii)   Class II

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number, of produce satisfying neither the requirements of the class nor the minimum requirements is allowed. With this tolerance not more than 2 per cent in total may consist of produce affected by decay.
B.   Size tolerances

For all classes: a total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number, of produce not satisfying the requirements as regards sizing is allowed.
V.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING PRESENTATION

A.   Uniformity

The contents of each package must be uniform and contain only produce of the same origin, variety or commercial type, quality and size.
However, a mixture of lettuces and/or endives of distinctly different, varieties, commercial types and/or colours may be packed together in a package, provided they are uniform in quality and, for each variety, commercial type and/or colour, in origin.
The visible part of the contents of the package must be representative of the entire contents.
B.   Packaging

The produce must be packed in such a way as to protect it properly. It must be reasonably packed having regard to the size and type of packaging, without empty spaces or crushing.
The materials used inside the package must be clean and of a quality such as to avoid causing any external or internal damage to the produce. The use of materials, particularly paper or stamps bearing trade specifications is allowed, provided the printing or labelling has been done with non-toxic ink or glue.
Packages must be free of all foreign matter.
VI.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING MARKING

Each package must bear the following particulars in letters grouped on the same side, legibly and indelibly marked, and visible from the outside:
A.   Identification

The name and the address of the packer and/or the dispatcher.
This mention may be replaced:






—


for all packages with the exception of pre-packages, by the officially issued or accepted code mark representing the packer and/or the dispatcher, indicated in close connection with the reference ‘Packer and/or Dispatcher’ (or equivalent abbreviations);










—


for pre-packages only, by the name and the address of a seller established within the Union indicated in close connection with the mention ‘Packed for:’ or an equivalent mention. In this case, the labelling shall also include a code representing the packer and/or the dispatcher. The seller shall give all information deemed necessary by the inspection body as to the meaning of this code.




B.   Nature of produce







—



                              ‘Lettuces’, ‘butterhead lettuces’, ‘batavia’, ‘crisphead lettuces (Iceberg)’, ‘cos lettuces’, ‘leaf lettuce’ (or, for example and where appropriate, ‘Oak leaf’, ‘Lollo bionda’, ‘Lollo rossa’),‘curled-leaved endives’, ‘broad-leaved (Batavian) endives’, or equivalent denomination if the contents are not visible from the outside.










—



                              ‘Little gem’ or equivalent denomination, where appropriate.










—



                              ‘Grown under protection’, or equivalent denomination where appropriate.










—


Name of the variety (optional).










—



                              ‘Mixture of lettuces/endives’, or equivalent denomination in the case of a mixture of lettuces and/or endives of distinctly different varieties, commercial types and/or colours. If the produce is not visible from the outside, the varieties, commercial types and/or colours, and the quantity of each in the package must be indicated.




C.   Origin of produce







—


Country of origin (17) and, optionally, district where grown, or national, regional or local place name.










—


In the case of a mixture of lettuces and/or endives of distinctly different varieties, commercial types and/or colours of different origins, the indication of each country of origin shall appear next to the name of the variety, commercial type and/or colour concerned.




D.   Commercial specifications







—


Class










—


Size, expressed by the minimum weight per unit, or number of units




E.   Official control mark (optional)

Packages need not to bear the particulars mentioned in the first subparagraph, when they contain sales packages, clearly visible from the outside, and all bearing these particulars. These packages shall be free from any indications such as could mislead. When these packages are palletised, the particulars shall be given on a notice placed in an obvious position on at least two sides of the pallet.
PART 5:   MARKETING STANDARD FOR PEACHES AND NECTARINES

I.   DEFINITION OF PRODUCE

This standard applies to peaches and nectarines of varieties (cultivars) grown from Prunus persica Sieb. and Zucc., to be supplied fresh to the consumer, peaches and nectarines for industrial processing being excluded.
II.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING QUALITY

The purpose of the standard is to define the quality requirements for peaches and nectarines, after preparation and packaging.
A.   Minimum requirements

In all classes, subject to the special provisions for each class and the tolerances allowed, peaches and nectarines must be:






—


intact,










—


sound; produce affected by rotting or deterioration such as to make it unfit for consumption is excluded,










—


clean, practically free of any visible foreign matter,










—


practically free from pests,










—


free from damage caused by pests affecting the flesh,










—


free of fruit split at the stalk cavity,










—


free of abnormal external moisture,










—


free of any foreign smell and/or taste.










—


The development and condition of peaches and nectarines must be such as to enable them:










—


to withstand transportation and handling, and










—


to arrive in satisfactory condition at the place of destination.




B.   Maturity requirements

The fruit must be sufficiently developed and display satisfactory ripeness. The minimum refractometric index of the flesh should be greater than or equal to 8° Brix.
C.   Classification

Peaches and nectarines are classified into three classes, as defined below:
(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

Peaches and nectarines in this class must be of a superior quality. They must be characteristic of the variety.
The flesh must be perfectly sound.
They must be free from defects with the exception of very slight superficial defects, provided that these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package.
(ii)   Class I

Peaches and nectarines in this class must be of good quality. They must be characteristic of the variety. The flesh must be perfectly sound.
The following slight skin defects, however, may be allowed provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package:






—


a slight defect in shape,










—


a slight defect in development,










—


slight defects in colouring,










—


slight pressure marks not exceeding 1 cm2 in total surface area,










—


slight skin defects which must not extend over more than:






—


1,5 cm in length for defects of elongated shape,










—


1 cm2 in total surface area for other defects.








(iii)   Class II

This class includes peaches and nectarines which do not qualify for inclusion in the higher classes, but satisfy the minimum requirements specified above.
The flesh must be free from major defects. The following skin defects may be allowed provided the peaches and nectarines retain their essential characteristics as regards the quality, the keeping quality and presentation:






—


defects in shape,










—


defects in development, including split stones, provided the fruit is closed and the flesh is sound,










—


defects in colouring,










—


bruises which may be slightly discoloured and not exceeding 2 cm2 in total surface area,










—


skin defects which must not extend over more than






—


2,5 cm in length for defects of elongated shape,










—


2 cm2 in total surface area for other defects.








III.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING SIZING

Size is determined either by the maximum diameter of the equatorial section, by weight, or by count.
The minimum size shall be:






—


56 mm or 85 g in Class ‘Extra’,










—


51 mm or 65 g in Classes I and II (if sized).




However, fruit below 56 mm or 85 g, is not marketed in the period from 1 July to 31 October (northern hemisphere) and from 1 January to 30 April (southern hemisphere).
The following provisions are optional for Class II.
To ensure uniformity in size, the range in size between produce in the same package shall not exceed:






(a)


For fruit sized by diameter:






—


5 mm for fruit below 70 mm,










—


10 mm for fruit of 70 mm and more.














(b)


For fruit sized by weight:






—


30 g for fruit below 180 g,










—


80 g for fruit of 180 g and more.














(c)


For fruit sized by count, the difference in size should be consistent with (a) or (b).
If size codes are applied, those in the table below have to be respected.










 


code


diameter


weight




from


to


from


to




(mm)


(mm)


(g)


(g)




1


D


51 


56 


65 


85 




2


C


56 


61 


85 


105 




3


B


61 


67 


105 


135 




4


A


67 


73 


135 


180 




5


AA


73 


80 


180 


220 




6


AAA


80 


90 


220 


300 




7


AAAA


> 90


> 300








IV.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING TOLERANCES

At all marketing stages, tolerances in respect of quality and size shall be allowed in each lot for produce not satisfying the requirements for the class indicated.
A.   Quality tolerances

(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

A total tolerance of 5 per cent, by number or weight, of peaches or nectarines not satisfying the requirements of the class, but meeting those of class I is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 0,5 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying the requirements of Class II quality.
(ii)   Class I

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of peaches or nectarines not satisfying the requirements of the class, but meeting those of class II is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 1 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying neither the requirements of Class II quality nor the minimum requirements, or of produce affected by decay.
(iii)   Class II

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of peaches or nectarines satisfying neither the requirements of the class nor the minimum requirements is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 2 per cent in total may consist of produce affected by decay.
B.   Size tolerances

For all classes (if sized): a total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of peaches or nectarines not satisfying the requirements as regards sizing is allowed.
V.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING PRESENTATION

A.   Uniformity

The contents of each package must be uniform and contain only peaches or nectarines of the same origin, variety, quality, degree of ripeness and size (if sized), and for the ‘Extra’ Class, the contents must also be uniform in colouring.
The visible part of the contents of the package must be representative of the entire contents.
B.   Packaging

The peaches or nectarines must be packed in such a way as to protect the produce properly.
The materials used inside the package must be clean and of a quality such as to avoid causing any external or internal damage to the produce. The use of materials, particularly of paper or stamps bearing trade specifications is allowed provided the printing or labelling has been done with non-toxic ink or glue.
Stickers individually affixed to the produce shall be such that, when removed, they neither leave visible traces of glue, nor lead to skin defects
Packages must be free of all foreign matter.
VI.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING MARKING

Each package must bear the following particulars in letters grouped on the same side, legibly and indelibly marked and visible from the outside:
A.   Identification

The name and the address of the packer and/or the dispatcher.
This mention may be replaced:






—


for all packages with the exception of pre-packages, by the officially issued or accepted code mark representing the packer and/or the dispatcher, indicated in close connection with the reference ‘Packer and/or dispatcher’ (or equivalent abbreviations);










—


for pre-packages only, by the name and the address of a seller established within the Union indicated in close connection with the mention ‘Packed for:’ or an equivalent mention. In this case, the labelling shall also include a code representing the packer and/or the dispatcher. The seller shall give all information deemed necessary by the inspection body as to the meaning of this code.




B.   Nature of produce







—



                              ‘Peaches’ or ‘Nectarines’, if the contents are not visible from the outside.










—


Colour of the flesh.










—


Name of the variety (optional).




C.   Origin of produce

Country of origin (18) and, optionally, district where grown, or national, regional or local place name.
D.   Commercial specifications







—


Class.










—


Size (if sized) expressed as minimum and maximum diameters (in mm) or minimum and maximum weights (in g) or as size code.










—


Number of units (optional).




E.   Official control mark (optional)

Packages need not to bear the particulars mentioned in the first subparagraph, when they contain sales packages, clearly visible from the outside, and all bearing these particulars. These packages shall be free from any indications such as could mislead. When these packages are palletised, the particulars shall be given on a notice placed in an obvious position on at least two sides of the pallet.
PART 6:   MARKETING STANDARD FOR PEARS

I.   DEFINITION OF PRODUCE

This standard applies to pears of varieties (cultivars) grown from Pyrus communis L. to be supplied fresh to the consumer, pears for industrial processing being excluded.
II.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING QUALITY

The purpose of the standard is to define the quality requirements for pears, after preparation and packaging.
A.   Minimum requirements

In all classes, subject to the special provisions for each class and the tolerances allowed, pears must be:






—


intact










—


sound; produce affected by rotting or deterioration such as to make it unfit for consumption is excluded










—


clean, practically free of any visible foreign matter










—


practically free from pests










—


free from damage caused by pests affecting the flesh










—


free of abnormal external moisture










—


free of any foreign smell and/or taste.




The development and condition of the pears must be such as to enable them:






—


to withstand transportation and handling, and










—


to arrive in satisfactory condition at the place of destination.




B.   Maturity requirements

The development and state of maturity of the pears must be such as to enable them to continue their ripening process and to reach the degree of ripeness required in relation to the varietal characteristics.
C.   Classification

Pears are classified in three classes, as defined below:
(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

Pears in this class must be of superior quality. They must be characteristic of the variety (19).
The flesh must be perfectly sound, and the skin free from rough russeting.
They must be free from defects with the exception of very slight superficial defects provided these do not affect the general appearance of the fruit, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package.
The stalk must be intact.
Pears must not be gritty.
(ii)   Class I

Pears in this class must be of good quality. They must be characteristic of the variety. (20)

The flesh must be perfectly sound.
The following slight defects, however, may be allowed, provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package:






—


a slight defect in shape










—


a slight defect in development










—


slight defects in colouring










—


very slight rough russeting










—


slight skin defects which must not extend over more than:






—


2 cm in length for defects of elongated shape










—


1 cm2 of total surface area for other defects, with the exception of scab (Venturia pirina and V. inaequalis), which must not extend over more than 0,25 cm2 cumulative in area.














—


slight bruising not exceeding 1 cm2 in area.




The stalk may be slightly damaged.
Pears must not be gritty.
(iii)   Class II

This class includes pears that do not qualify for inclusion in the higher classes but satisfy the minimum requirements specified above.
The flesh must be free from major defects.
The following defects may be allowed provided the pears retain their essential characteristics as regards the quality, the keeping quality and presentation.






—


defects in shape










—


defects in development










—


defects in colouring










—


slight rough russeting










—


skin defects which must not extend over more than:






—


4 cm in length for defects of elongated shape










—


2,5 cm2 of total surface area for other defects, with the exception of scab (Venturia pirina and V. inaequalis), which must not extend over more than 1 cm2 cumulative in area.










—


slight bruising not exceeding 2 cm2 in area.








III.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING SIZING

Size is determined by maximum diameter of the equatorial section or by weight.
The minimum size shall be:






(a)


For fruit sized by diameter:








 


‘Extra’


Class I


Class II




Large-fruited varieties


60  mm


55  mm


55  mm




Other varieties


55  mm


50  mm


45  mm














(b)


For fruit sized by weight:








 


‘Extra’


Class I


Class II




Large-fruited varieties


130  g


110  g


110  g




Other varieties


110  g


100  g


75  g








Summer pears included in the Appendix to this standard do not have to respect the minimum size.
To ensure the uniformity in size, the range in size between produce in the same package shall not exceed:






(a)


For fruit sized by diameter:






—


5 mm for ‘Extra’ Class fruit and for Class I and II fruit packed in rows and layers










—


10 mm for Class I fruit packed loose in the package or in sales packages.














(b)


For fruit sized by weight:






—


for ‘Extra’ Class fruit and Class I and II fruit packed in rows and layers:






Range (g)


Weight difference (g)




75-100


15 




100–200


35 




200-250


50 




> 250


80 














—


for Class I fruit packed loose in the package or in sales packages:






Range (g)


Weight difference (g)




75-100


25 




100–200


50 




> 200


100 












There is no sizing uniformity limit for Class II fruit packed loose in the package or in sales packages.
IV.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING TOLERANCES

At all marketing stages, tolerances in respect of quality and size shall be allowed in each lot for produce not satisfying the requirements of the class indicated.
A.   Quality tolerances

(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

A total tolerance of 5 per cent, by number or weight, of pears not satisfying the requirements of the class but meeting those of Class I is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 0,5 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying the requirements of Class II quality.
(ii)   Class I

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of pears not satisfying the requirements of the class but meeting those of Class II is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 1 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying neither the requirements of Class II quality nor the minimum requirements, or of produce affected by decay.
(iii)   Class II

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of pears satisfying neither the requirements of the class nor the minimum requirements is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 2 per cent in total may consist of produce affected by decay.
B.   Size tolerances

For all classes: a total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of pears not satisfying the requirements as regards sizing is allowed, with a maximum variation of:






—


5 mm below the minimum diameter










—


10 g below the minimum weight.




V.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING PRESENTATION

A.   Uniformity

The contents of each package must be uniform and contain only pears of the same origin, variety, quality, and size (if sized) and the same degree of ripeness.
In the case of the ‘Extra’ Class, uniformity also applies to colouring.
However, a mixture of pears of distinctly different varieties may be packed together in a sales package, provided they are uniform in quality and, for each variety concerned, in origin.
The visible part of the contents of the package must be representative of the entire contents.
B.   Packaging

Pears must be packed in such a way as to protect the produce properly.
The materials used inside the package must be clean and of a quality such as to avoid causing any external or internal damage to the produce. The use of materials, particularly of paper or stamps bearing trade specifications is allowed provided the printing or labelling has been done with non-toxic ink or glue.
Stickers individually affixed on the produce shall be such that, when removed, they neither leave visible traces of glue, nor lead to skin defects.
Packages must be free of all foreign matter.
VI.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING MARKING

Each package must bear the following particulars, in letters grouped on the same side, legibly and indelibly marked, and visible from the outside.
A.   Identification

The name and the address of the packer and/or the dispatcher
This mention may be replaced:






—


for all packages with the exception of pre-packages, by the officially issued or accepted code mark representing the packer and/or the dispatcher, indicated in close connection with the reference ‘Packer and/or Dispatcher’ (or equivalent abbreviations);










—


for pre-packages only, by the name and the address of a seller established within the Union indicated in close connection with the mention ‘Packed for:’ or an equivalent mention. In this case, the labelling shall also include a code representing the packer and/or the dispatcher. The seller shall give all information deemed necessary by the inspection body as to the meaning of this code.




B.   Nature of produce







—



                              ‘Pears’, if the contents are not visible from the outside.










—


Name of the variety. In the case of a mixture of pears of distinctly different varieties, names of the different varieties.




C.   Origin of produce

Country of origin (21) and, optionally, district where grown, or national, regional or local place name. In the case of a mixture of distinctly different varieties of pears of different origins, the indication of each country of origin shall appear next to the name of the variety concerned.
D.   Commercial specifications







—


Class.










—


Size, or for fruit packed in rows and layers, number of units.










—


If identification is by the size, this should be expressed:






(a)


for produce subject to the uniformity rules, as minimum and maximum diameters or minimum and maximum weights,










(b)


for produce not subject to the uniformity rules, the diameter or the weight of the smallest fruit in the package followed by ‘and over’ or equivalent denomination or, where appropriate, the diameter or the weight of the largest fruit in the package.








E.   Official control mark (optional)

Packages need not to bear the particulars mentioned in the first subparagraph, when they contain sales packages, clearly visible from the outside, and all bearing these particulars. These packages shall be free from any indications such as could mislead. When these packages are palletised, the particulars shall be given on a notice placed in an obvious position on at least two sides of the pallet.


Appendix


Size criteria for pears









L


=


Large-fruited variety




SP


=


Summer pear, for which no minimum size is required.





Non-exhaustive list of large-fruited and summer pear varieties

Small-fruited and other varieties which do not appear in the list may be marketed as long as they meet the size requirements for other varieties as described in section III of the standard.
Some of the varieties listed in the following may be marketed under names for which trademark protection has been sought or obtained in one or more countries. The first and second columns of the table hereunder do not intend to include such trade names. References to known trademarks have been included in the third column for information only.








Variety


Synonyms


Trade names


Size




Abbé Fétel


Abate Fetel


 


L




Abugo o Siete en Boca


 


 


SP




Aka


 


 


SP




Alka


 


 


L




Alsa


 


 


L




Amfora


 


 


L




Alexandrine Douillard


 


 


L




Bambinella


 


 


SP




Bergamotten


 


 


SP




Beurré Alexandre Lucas


Lucas


 


L




Beurré Bosc


Bosc, Beurré d’Apremont, Empereur Alexandre, Kaiser Alexander


 


L




Beurré Clairgeau


 


 


L




Beurré d’Arenberg


Hardenpont


 


L




Beurré Giffard


 


 


SP




Beurré précoce Morettini


Morettini


 


SP




Blanca de Aranjuez


Agua de Aranjuez, Espadona, Blanquilla


 


SP




Carusella


 


 


SP




Castell


Castell de Verano


 


SP




Colorée de Juillet


Bunte Juli


 


SP




Comice rouge


 


 


L




Concorde


 


 


L




Condoula


 


 


SP




Coscia


Ercolini


 


SP




Curé


Curato, Pastoren, Del cura de Ouro, Espadon de invierno, Bella de Berry, Lombardia de Rioja, Batall de Campana


 


L




D’Anjou


 


 


L




Dita


 


 


L




D. Joaquina


Doyenné de Juillet


 


SP




Doyenné d’hiver


Winterdechant


 


L




Doyenné du Comice


Comice, Vereinsdechant


 


L




Erika


 


 


L




Etrusca


 


 


SP




Flamingo


 


 


L




Forelle


 


 


L




Général Leclerc


 


Amber Grace


L




Gentile


 


 


SP




Golden Russet Bosc


 


 


L




Grand champion


 


 


L




Harrow Delight


 


 


L




Jeanne d’Arc


 


 


L




Joséphine


 


 


L




Kieffer


 


 


L




Klapa Mīlule


 


 


L




Leonardeta


Mosqueruela, Margallon, Colorada de Alcanadre, Leonarda de Magallon


 


SP




Lombacad


 


Cascade


L




Moscatella


 


 


SP




Mramornaja


 


 


L




Mustafabey


 


 


SP




Packham’s Triumph


Williams d’Automne


 


L




Passe Crassane


Passa Crassana


 


L




Perita de San Juan


 


 


SP




Pérola


 


 


SP




Pitmaston


Williams Duchesse


 


L




Précoce de Trévoux


Trévoux


 


SP




Président Drouard


 


 


L




Rosemarie


 


 


L




Santa Maria


Santa Maria Morettini


 


SP




Spadoncina


Agua de Verano, Agua de Agosto


 


SP




Suvenirs


 


 


L




Taylors Gold


 


 


L




Triomphe de Vienne


 


 


L




Vasarine Sviestine


 


 


L




Williams Bon Chrétien


Bon Chrétien, Bartlett, Williams, Summer Bartlett


 


L






PART 7:   MARKETING STANDARD FOR STRAWBERRIES

I.   DEFINITION OF PRODUCE

This standard applies to strawberries of varieties (cultivars) grown from the genus Fragaria L. to be supplied fresh to the consumer, strawberries for industrial processing being excluded.
II.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING QUALITY

The purpose of the standard is to define the quality requirements for strawberries, after preparation and packaging.
A.   Minimum requirements

In all classes, subject to the special provisions for each class and the tolerances allowed, the strawberries must be:






—


intact, undamaged,










—


sound; produce affected by rotting or deterioration such as to make it unfit for consumption is excluded,










—


clean, practically free of any visible foreign matter,










—


fresh in appearance, but not washed,










—


practically free from pests,










—


practically free from damage caused by pests,










—


with the calyx (except in the case of wood strawberries); the calyx and the stalk (if present) must be fresh and green,










—


free of abnormal external moisture,










—


free of any foreign smell and/or taste.




The strawberries must be sufficiently developed and display satisfactory ripeness. The development and the condition must be such as to enable them:






—


to withstand transportation and handling, and










—


to arrive in satisfactory condition at the place of destination.




B.   Classification

The strawberries are classified in three classes, as defined below:
(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

The strawberries in this class must be of superior quality. They must be characteristic of the variety.
They must be bright in appearance, allowing for the characteristics of the variety.
They must be free from soil.
They must be free from defects with the exception of very slight superficial defects, provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package.
(ii)   Class I

Strawberries in this class must be of good quality. They must be characteristic of the variety.
The following slight defects, however, may be allowed provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package:






—


a slight defect in shape,










—


presence of a small white patch, not exceeding one tenth of the total surface area of the fruit,










—


slight superficial pressure marks.




They must be practically free from soil.
(iii)   Class II

This class includes strawberries that do not qualify for inclusion in the higher classes, but satisfy the minimum requirements specified above.
The following defects may be allowed provided the strawberries retain their essential characteristics as regards the quality, the keeping quality and presentation:






—


defects in shape,










—


a white patch not exceeding one fifth of the total surface area of the fruit,










—


slight dry bruising not likely to spread,










—


slight traces of soil.




III.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING SIZING

Size is determined by the maximum diameter of the equatorial section.
The minimum size shall be:






—


25 mm in ‘Extra’ Class,










—


18 mm in Classes I and II.




There is no minimum size for wood strawberries.
IV.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING TOLERANCES

At all marketing stages, tolerances in respect of quality and size shall be allowed in each lot for produce not satisfying the requirements of the class indicated.
A.   Quality tolerances

(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

A total tolerance of 5 per cent, by number or weight, of strawberries not satisfying the requirements of the class but meeting those of Class I is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 0,5 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying the requirements of Class II quality.
(ii)   Class I

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of strawberries not satisfying the requirements of the class but meeting those of Class II is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 2 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying neither the requirements of Class II quality nor the minimum requirements, or of produce affected by decay.
(iii)   Class II

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of strawberries satisfying neither the requirements of the class nor the minimum requirements is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 2 per cent in total may consist of produce affected by decay.
B.   Size tolerances

For all classes: a total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of strawberries not satisfying the requirements as regards the minimum size is allowed.
V.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING PRESENTATION

A.   Uniformity

The contents of each package must be uniform and contain only strawberries of the same origin, variety and quality.
In the ‘Extra’ Class, strawberries, with the exception of wood strawberries, must be particularly uniform and regular with respect to degree of ripeness, colour and size. In Class I, strawberries may be less uniform in size.
The visible part of the contents of the package must be representative of the entire contents.
B.   Packaging

The strawberries must be packed in such a way as to protect the produce properly.
The materials used inside the package must be clean and of a quality such as to avoid causing any external or internal damage to the produce. The use of materials, particularly of paper or stamps bearing trade specifications is allowed provided the printing or labelling has been done with non-toxic ink or glue.
Packages must be free of all foreign matter.
VI.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING MARKING

Each package must bear the following particulars, in letters grouped on the same side, legibly and indelibly marked, and visible from the outside:
A.   Identification

The name and the address of the packer and/or the dispatcher
This mention may be replaced:






—


for all packages with the exception of pre-packages, by the officially issued or accepted code mark representing the packer and/or the dispatcher, indicated in close connection with the reference ‘Packer and/or Dispatcher’ (or equivalent abbreviations);










—


for pre-packages only, by the name and the address of a seller established within the Union indicated in close connection with the mention ‘Packed for:’ or an equivalent mention. In this case, the labelling shall also include a code representing the packer and/or the dispatcher. The seller shall give all information deemed necessary by the inspection body as to the meaning of this code.




B.   Nature of produce







—



                              ‘Strawberries’ if the contents of the package are not visible from the outside.










—


Name of the variety (optional).




C.   Origin of produce

Country of origin (22) and, optionally, district where grown or national, regional or local place name.
D.   Commercial specifications







—


Class.




E.   Official control mark (optional)

Packages need not to bear the particulars mentioned in the first subparagraph, when they contain sales packages, clearly visible from the outside, and all bearing these particulars. These packages shall be free from any indications such as could mislead. When these packages are palletised, the particulars shall be given on a notice placed in an obvious position on at least two sides of the pallet.
PART 8:   MARKETING STANDARD FOR SWEET PEPPERS

I.   DEFINITION OF PRODUCE

This standard applies to sweet peppers of varieties (23) (cultivars) grown from Capsicum annuum L., to be supplied fresh to the consumer, sweet peppers for industrial processing being excluded.
II.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING QUALITY

The purpose of the standard is to define the quality requirements for sweet peppers, after preparation and packaging.
A.   Minimum requirements

In all classes, subject to the special provisions for each class and the tolerances allowed, the sweet peppers must be:






—


intact,










—


sound; produce affected by rotting or deterioration such as to make it unfit for consumption is excluded,










—


clean, practically free of any visible foreign matter,










—


fresh in appearance,










—


firm,










—


practically free from pests,










—


free from damage caused by pests affecting the flesh,










—


free of damage caused by low temperature or frost,










—


with peduncles attached; the peduncle must be neatly cut and the calyx be intact,










—


free of abnormal external moisture,










—


free of any foreign smell and/or taste.




The development and condition of the sweet peppers must be such as to enable them to:






—


withstand transport and handling, and










—


arrive in satisfactory condition at the place of destination.




B.   Classification

Sweet peppers are classified in three classes, as defined below:
(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

Sweet peppers in this class must be of superior quality. They must be characteristic of the variety and/or commercial type.
They must be free from defects, with the exception of very slight superficial defects, provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package.
(ii)   Class I

Sweet peppers in this class must be of good quality. They must be characteristic of the variety and/or commercial type.
The following slight defects, however, may be allowed, provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package:






—


a slight defect in shape










—


slight silvering or damage caused by thrips covering not more than 1/3 of the total surface area










—


slight skin defects, such as:






—


pitting, scratching, sunburn, pressure marks covering in total not more than 2 cm for defects of elongated shape, and 1 cm2 for other defects; or










—


dry superficial cracks covering in total not more than 1/8 of the total surface area














—


slightly damaged peduncle.




(iii)   Class II

This class includes sweet peppers which do not qualify for inclusion in the higher classes but satisfy the minimum requirements specified above.
The following defects may be allowed provided the sweet peppers retain their essential characteristics as regards the quality, the keeping quality and presentation:






—


defects in shape,










—


silvering or damage caused by thrips covering not more than 2/3 of the total surface area










—


skin defects, such as:






—


pitting, scratching, sunburn, bruising, and healed injuries covering in total not more than 4 cm in length for defects of elongated shape and 2,5 cm2 of the total area for other defects; or










—


dry superficial cracks covering in total not more than 1/4 of the total surface area














—


blossom end deterioration not more than 1 cm2











—


shrivelling not exceeding 1/3 of the surface










—


damaged peduncle and calyx, provided the surrounding flesh remains intact.




III.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING SIZING

Size is determined by the maximum diameter of the equatorial section or by weight. To ensure uniformity in size, the range in size between produce in the same package shall not exceed:






(a)


For sweet peppers sized by diameter:






—


20 mm.














(b)


For sweet peppers sized by weight:






—


30 g where the heaviest piece weighs 180 g or less,










—


40 g where the smallest piece weighs more than 180 g.








Elongated sweet peppers should be sufficiently uniform in length.
Uniformity in size is not compulsory for Class II.
IV.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING TOLERANCES

At all marketing stages, tolerances in respect of quality and size shall be allowed in each lot for produce not satisfying the requirements of the class indicated.
A.   Quality tolerances

(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

A total tolerance of 5 per cent, by number or weight, of sweet peppers not satisfying the requirements of the class but meeting those of Class I is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 0,5 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying the requirements of Class II quality.
(ii)   Class I

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of sweet peppers not satisfying the requirements of the class, but meeting those of Class II is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 1 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying neither the requirements of Class II quality nor the minimum requirements or of produce affected by decay.
(iii)   Class II

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of sweet peppers satisfying neither the requirements of the class nor the minimum requirements is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 2 per cent in total may consist of produce affected by decay.
B.   Size tolerances

For all classes (if sized): a total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of sweet peppers not satisfying the requirements as regards sizing is allowed.
V.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING PRESENTATION

A.   Uniformity

The contents of each package must be uniform and contain only sweet peppers of the same origin, variety or commercial type, quality, size (if sized) and, in the case of Classes ‘Extra’ and I, of appreciably the same degree of ripeness and colouring.
However, a mixture of sweet peppers of distinctly different commercial types and/or colours may be packed together in a package, provided they are uniform in quality, and for each commercial type and/or colour concerned, in origin.
The visible part of the contents of the package must be representative of the entire contents.
B.   Packaging

The sweet peppers must be packed in such a way as to protect the produce properly.
The materials used inside the package must be clean and of a quality such as to avoid causing any external or internal damage to the produce. The use of materials, particularly paper or stamps bearing trade specifications is allowed, provided the printing or labelling has been done with non-toxic ink or glue.
Stickers individually affixed on the produce shall be such that, when removed, they neither leave visible traces of glue, nor lead to skin defects.
Packages must be free of all foreign matter.
VI.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING MARKING

Each package must bear the following particulars, in letters grouped on the same side, legibly and indelibly marked, and visible from the outside:
A.   Identification

The name and the address of the packer and/or the dispatcher
This mention may be replaced:






—


for all packages with the exception of pre-packages, by the officially issued or accepted code mark representing the packer and/or the dispatcher, indicated in close connection with the reference ‘Packer and/or Dispatcher’ (or equivalent abbreviations),










—


for pre-packages only, by the name and the address of a seller established within the Union indicated in close connection with the mention ‘Packed for:’ or an equivalent mention. In this case, the labelling shall also include a code representing the packer and/or the dispatcher. The seller shall give all information deemed necessary by the inspection body as to the meaning of this code.




B.   Nature of produce







—



                              ‘Sweet peppers’ if the contents are not visible from the outside.










—



                              ‘Mixture of sweet peppers’, or equivalent denomination, in the case of a mixture of distinctly different commercial types and/or colours of sweet peppers. If the produce is not visible from the outside, the commercial types and/or colours and the quantity of each in the package must be indicated.




C.   Origin of produce

Country of origin (24) and, optionally, district where grown or national, regional or local place name.
In the case of a mixture of distinctly different commercial types and/or colours of sweet peppers of different origins, the indication of each country of origin shall appear next to the name of the commercial type and/or colour concerned.
D.   Commercial specifications







—


Class.










—


Size (if sized) expressed as minimum and maximum diameters or minimum and maximum weights.










—


Number of units (optional).










—



                              ‘Hot’ or equivalent denomination, where appropriate.




E.   Official control mark (optional)

Packages need not to bear the particulars mentioned in the first subparagraph, when they contain sales packages, clearly visible from the outside, and all bearing these particulars. These packages shall be free from any indications such as could mislead. When these packages are palletised, the particulars shall be given on a notice placed in an obvious position on at least two sides of the pallet.
PART 9:   MARKETING STANDARD FOR TABLE GRAPES

I.   DEFINITION OF PRODUCE

This standard applies to table grapes of varieties (cultivars) grown from Vitis vinifera L. to be supplied fresh to the consumer, table grapes for industrial processing being excluded.
II.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING QUALITY

The purpose of the standard is to define the quality requirements for table grapes, after preparation and packaging.
A.   Minimum requirements

In all classes, subject to the special provisions for each class and the tolerances allowed, bunches and berries must be:






—


sound; produce affected by rotting or deterioration such as to make it unfit for consumption is excluded,










—


clean, practically free of any visible foreign matter,










—


practically free from pests,










—


practically free from damage caused by pests,










—


free of abnormal external moisture,










—


free of any foreign smell and/or taste.




In addition, berries must be:






—


intact,










—


well formed,










—


normally developed.




Pigmentation due to sun is not a defect.
The development and condition of the table grapes must be such as to enable them:






—


to withstand transportation and handling, and










—


to arrive in satisfactory condition at the place of destination.




B.   Maturity requirements

The juice of the fruit shall have a refractometric index of at least:






—


12 °Brix for the Alphonse Lavallée, Cardinal and Victoria varieties,










—


13 °Brix for all other seeded varieties,










—


14 °Brix for all seedless varieties.




In addition, all varieties must have satisfactory sugar/acidity ratio levels.
C.   Classification

The table grapes are classified into three classes defined below:
(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

Table grapes in this class must be of superior quality. They must be characteristic of the variety, allowing for the district in which they are grown. Berries must be firm, firmly attached, evenly spaced along the stalk and have their bloom virtually intact.
They must be free from defects, with the exception of very slight superficial defects, provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package.
(ii)   Class I

Table grapes in this class must be of good quality. They must be characteristic of the variety, allowing for the district in which they are grown. Berries must be firm, firmly attached and, as far as possible, have their bloom intact. They may, however, be less evenly spaced along the stalk than in the ‘Extra’ Class.
The following slight defects, however, may be allowed, provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality, and presentation in the package:






—


a slight defect in shape,










—


slight defects in colouring,










—


very slight sun scorch affecting the skin only.




(iii)   Class II

This class includes table grapes that do not qualify for inclusion in the higher classes, but satisfy the minimum requirements specified above.
The bunches may show slight defects in shape, development and colouring, provided these do not impair the essential characteristics of the variety, allowing for the district in which they are grown.
The berries must be sufficiently firm and sufficiently firmly attached, and, where possible, still have their bloom. They may be less evenly spaced along the stalk than in Class I.
The following defects may be allowed provided the table grapes retain their essential characteristics as regards the quality, the keeping quality and presentation:






—


defects in shape,










—


defects in colouring,










—


slight sun scorch affecting the skin only,










—


slight bruising,










—


slight skin defects.




III.   PROVISIONS CONCERNIG SIZING

Size is determined by the weight of the bunch.
The minimum bunch weight shall be 75 g. This provision does not apply to packages intended for single servings.
IV.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING TOLERANCES

At all marketing stages, tolerances in respect of quality and size shall be allowed in each lot for produce not satisfying the requirements of the class indicated.
A.   Quality tolerances

i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

A total tolerance of 5 per cent, by weight, of bunches not satisfying the requirements of the class, but meeting those for Class I is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 0,5 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying the requirements of Class II quality.
ii)   Class I

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by weight, of bunches not satisfying the requirements of the class, but meeting those of Class II is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 1 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying neither the requirements of Class II quality nor the minimum requirements, or of produce affected by decay.
iii)   Class II

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by weight, of bunches satisfying neither the requirements of the class nor the minimum requirements is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 2 per cent in total may consist of produce affected by decay.
B.   Size tolerances

For all classes: a total tolerance of 10 per cent, by weight, of bunches not satisfying the requirements as regards sizing is allowed. In each sales package, one bunch weighing less than 75 g is allowed to adjust the weight, provided the bunch meets all other requirements of the specified class.
V.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING PRESENTATION

A.   Uniformity

The contents of each package must be uniform and contain only bunches of the same origin, variety, quality and degree of ripeness.
In the case of the ‘Extra’ Class, the bunches must be approximately uniform in size and colouring.
However, a mixture of table grapes of distinctly different varieties may be packed together in a package, provided they are uniform in quality and, for each variety concerned, in origin.
The visible part of the contents of the package must be representative of the entire contents.
B.   Packaging

The table grapes must be packed in such a way as to protect the produce properly.
The materials used inside the package must be clean and of a quality such as to avoid causing any external or internal damage to the produce. The use of materials, particularly paper or stamps, bearing trade specifications is allowed provided the printing or labelling has been done with non-toxic ink or glue.
Stickers individually affixed on the produce shall be such that, when removed, they neither leave visible traces of glue, nor lead to skin defects.
Packages must be free of all foreign matter, although a fragment of vine shoot no more than 5 cm in length may be left on the stem of the bunch as a form of special presentation.
VI.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING MARKING

Each package must bear the following particulars in letters grouped on the same side, legibly and indelibly marked, and visible from the outside:
A.   Identification

The name and the address of the packer and/or the dispatcher
This mention may be replaced:






—


for all packages with the exception of pre-packages, by the officially issued or accepted code mark representing the packer and/or the dispatcher, indicated in close connection with the reference ‘Packer and/or Dispatcher’ (or equivalent abbreviations);










—


for pre-packages only, by the name and the address of a seller established within the Union indicated in close connection with the mention ‘Packed for:’ or an equivalent mention. In this case, the labelling shall also include a code representing the packer and/or the dispatcher. The seller shall give all information deemed necessary by the inspection body as to the meaning of this code.




B.   Nature of produce







—



                              ‘Table Grapes’ if the contents are not visible from the outside.










—


Name of the variety. In the case of a mixture of table grapes of distinctly different varieties, names of the different varieties.




C.   Origin of produce







—


Country of origin (25) and, optionally, district where grown, or national, regional or local place name.










—


In the case of a mixture of distinctly different varieties of table grapes of different origins, the indication of each country of origin shall appear next to the name of the variety concerned.




D.   Commercial specifications







—


Class.










—



                              ‘Bunches below 75 g intended for single servings’, where appropriate.




E.   Official control mark (optional)

Packages need not to bear the particulars mentioned in the first subparagraph, when they contain sales packages, clearly visible from the outside, and all bearing these particulars. These packages shall be free from any indications such as could mislead. When these packages are palletised, the particulars shall be given on a notice placed in an obvious position on at least two sides of the pallet.


Appendix

Exhaustive list of small-berry varieties







Variety


Other names under which the variety is known




Admirable de Courtiller


Admirable, Csiri Csuri




Albillo


Acerba, Albuela, Blanco Ribera, Cagalon




Angelo Pirovano


I. Pirovano 2




Annamaria


I. Ubizzoni 4




Baltali


 




Beba


Beba de los Santos, Eva




Catalanesca


Catalanesa, Catalana, Uva Catalana




Chasselas blanc


Chasselas doré, Fendant, Franceset, Franceseta, Gutedel, Krachgutedel, White van der Laan




Chasselas rouge


Roter Gutedel




Chelva


Chelva de Cebreros, Guareña, Mantuo, Villanueva




Ciminnita


Cipro bianco




Clairette


Blanquette, Malvoisie, Uva de Jijona




Colombana bianca


Verdea, Colombana de Peccioli




Crimson Seedless


 




Csaba gyöngye


Cabski biser, Julski Muscat, Muscat Julius, Perle de Csaba, Perla di Csaba




Dawn seedless


 




Dehlro


 




Delizia di Vaprio


I. Pirovano 46 A




Eclipse Seedless


 




Exalta


 




Flame Seedless


Red Flame




Gros Vert


Abbondanza, St Jeannet, Trionfo dell’Esposizione, Verdal, Trionfo di Gerusalemme




Jaoumet


Madeleine de St Jacques, Saint Jacques




Madeleine


Angevine, Angevine Oberlin, Madeleine Angevine Oberlin, Republicain




Mireille


 




Molinera


Besgano, Castiza, Molinera gorda




Moscato d'Adda


Muscat d'Adda




Moscato d'Amburgo


Black Muscat, Hambro, Hamburg, Hamburski Misket, Muscat d'Hambourg, Moscato Preto




Moscato di Terracina


Moscato di Maccarese




Muscat Seedless


 




Muska


 




Œillade


Black Malvoisie, Cinsaut, Cinsault, Ottavianello, Sinso




Panse precoce


Bianco di Foster, Foster's white, Sicilien




Perla di Csaba


Càbski Biser, Julski muskat, Muscat Julius, Perle de Csaba




Perlaut


 




Perlette


 




Pirobella


 




Pizzutello bianco


Aetonychi aspro, Coretto, Cornichon blanc, Rish Baba, Sperone di gallo, Teta di vacca




Precoce de Malingre


 




Primus


I. Pirovano 7




Prunesta


Bermestia nera, Pergola rossa, Pergolese di Tivoli




Servant


Servan, Servant di Spagna




Sideritis


Sidiritis




Sultanines


Bidaneh, Kishmich, Kis Mis, Sultan, Sultana, Sultani, Cekirdesksiz, Sultanina bianca, Sultaniye, Thompson Seedless and mutations




Sundance


 




Sunred Seedless


 




Szőlőskertek Királynője


Königin der Weingärten, Szőlőskertek Királynője muskotály, Szőlőskertek Királynéja, Rasaki ourgarias, Regina Villoz, Reina de las Viñas, Reine des Vignes, I. Mathiasz 140, Queen of the Vineyards, Regina dei Vigneti




Thompson Seedless and Mutations


 




Valenci blanc


Valensi, Valency, Panse blanche




Valenci noir


Planta Mula, Rucial de Mula, Valenci negro




Yapincak


 






PART 10:   MARKETING STANDARD FOR TOMATOES

I.   DEFINITION OF PRODUCE

This standard applies to tomatoes of varieties (cultivars) grown from Solanum lycopersicum L. to be supplied fresh to the consumer, tomatoes for industrial processing being excluded.
Tomatoes may be classified into four commercial types:






—



                           ‘round’,










—



                           ‘ribbed’,










—



                           ‘oblong’ or ‘elongated’,










—



                           ‘cherry’ tomatoes (including ‘cocktail’ tomatoes).




II.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING QUALITY

The purpose of the standard is to define the quality requirements for tomatoes, after preparation and packaging.
A.   Minimum requirements

In all classes, subject to the special provisions for each class and the tolerances allowed, the tomatoes must be:






—


intact,










—


sound, produce affected by rotting or deterioration such as to make it unfit for consumption is excluded,










—


clean, practically free of any visible foreign matter,










—


fresh in appearance,










—


practically free from pests,










—


free from damage caused by pests affecting the flesh,










—


free of abnormal external moisture,










—


free of any foreign smell and/or taste.




In the case of trusses of tomatoes, the stalks must be fresh, healthy, clean and free from all leaves and any visible foreign matter.
The development and condition of the tomatoes must be such as to enable them:






—


to withstand transportation and handling, and










—


to arrive in satisfactory condition at the place of destination.




B.   Classification

Tomatoes are classified in three classes, as defined below:
(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

Tomatoes in this class must be of superior quality. They must be firm and characteristic of the variety and/or commercial type.
Their colouring, according to their state of ripeness, must be such as to satisfy the requirements set out in the third paragraph of point A above.
They must be free from greenbacks and other defects, with the exception of very slight superficial defects, provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package.
(ii)   Class I

Tomatoes in this class must be of good quality. They must be reasonably firm and characteristic of the variety and/or commercial type.
They must be free of cracks and visible greenbacks. The following slight defects, however, may be allowed provided these do not affect the general appearance of the produce, the quality, the keeping quality and presentation in the package:






—


a slight defect in shape and development,










—


slight defects in colouring,










—


slight skin defects,










—


very slight bruises.




Furthermore, ‘ribbed’ tomatoes may show:






—


healed cracks not more than 1 cm long,










—


no excessive protuberances,










—


small umbilicus, but no suberization,










—


suberization of the stigma up to 1 cm2,










—


fine blossom scar in elongated form (like a seam), but not longer than two-thirds of the greatest diameter of the fruit.




(iii)   Class II

This class includes tomatoes which do not qualify for inclusion in the higher classes, but satisfy the minimum requirements specified above.
They must be reasonably firm (but may be slightly less firm than in Class I) and must not show unhealed cracks.
The following defects may be allowed provided the tomatoes retain their essential characteristics as regards the quality, the keeping quality and presentation:






—


defects in shape and development,










—


defects in colouring,










—


skin defects or bruises, provided the fruit is not seriously affected,










—


healed cracks not more than 3 cm in length for round, ribbed or oblong tomatoes.




Furthermore, ‘ribbed’ tomatoes may show:






—


more pronounced protuberances than allowed under Class I, but without being misshapen,










—


an umbilicus,










—


suberization of the stigma up to 2 cm2,










—


fine blossom scar in elongated form (like a seam).




III.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING SIZING

Size is determined by the maximum diameter of the equatorial section, by weight or by count.
The following provisions shall not apply to trusses of tomatoes and to cherry tomatoes, and are optional for Class II.
To ensure uniformity in size, the range in size between produce in the same package shall not exceed:






(a)


For tomatoes sized by diameter:






—


10 mm, if the diameter of the smallest fruit (as indicated on the package) is under 50 mm,










—


15 mm, if the diameter of the smallest fruit (as indicated on the package) is 50 mm and over but under 70 mm,










—


20 mm, if the diameter of the smallest fruit (as indicated on the package) is 70 mm and over but under 100 mm,










—


there is no limitation of difference in diameter for fruit equal or over 100 mm.




In case size codes are applied, the codes and ranges in the following table have to be respected:






Size code


Diameter (mm)




0


≤ 20




1


> 20 ≤ 25




2


> 25 ≤ 30




3


> 30 ≤ 35




4


> 35 ≤ 40




5


> 40 ≤ 47




6


> 47 ≤ 57




7


> 57 ≤ 67




8


> 67 ≤ 82




9


> 82 ≤ 102




10


> 102














(b)


For tomatoes sized by weight or by count, the difference in size should be consistent with the difference indicated in point (a).




IV.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING TOLERANCES

At all marketing stages, tolerances in respect of quality and size shall be allowed in each lot for produce not satisfying the requirements of the class indicated.
A.   Quality tolerances

(i)   
                                       ‘Extra’ Class

A total tolerance of 5 per cent, by number or weight, of tomatoes not satisfying the requirements of the class but meeting those of Class I is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 0,5 per cent in total may consist of produce satisfying the requirements of Class II quality.
(ii)   Class I

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of tomatoes not satisfying the requirements of the class but meeting those of Class II is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 1 per cent in total may consist of produce neither satisfying the requirements of Class II quality nor the minimum requirements, or of produce affected by decay. In the case of trusses of tomatoes, 5 percent, by number or weight, of tomatoes detached from the stalk is allowed.
(iii)   Class II

A total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of tomatoes satisfying neither the requirements of the class nor the minimum requirements is allowed. Within this tolerance not more than 2 per cent in total may consist of produce affected by decay. In the case of trusses of tomatoes, 10 percent, by number or weight, of tomatoes detached from the stalk is allowed.
B.   Size tolerances

For all classes: a total tolerance of 10 per cent, by number or weight, of tomatoes not satisfying the requirements as regards sizing is allowed.
V.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING PRESENTATION

A.   Uniformity

The contents of each package must be uniform and contain only tomatoes of the same origin, variety or commercial type, quality and size (if sized).
The ripeness and colouring of tomatoes in ‘Extra’ Class and Class I must be practically uniform. In addition, the length of ‘oblong’ tomatoes must be sufficiently uniform.
However, a mixture of tomatoes of distinctly different colours, varieties and/or commercial types may be packed together in a package, provided they are uniform in quality and, for each colour, variety and/or commercial type concerned, in origin.
The visible part of the contents of the package must be representative of the entire contents.
B.   Packaging

Tomatoes must be packed in such a way as to protect the produce properly.
The materials used inside the package must be clean and of a quality such as to avoid causing any external or internal damage to the produce. The use of materials, particularly paper or stamps bearing trade specifications is allowed provided the printing or labelling has been done with non-toxic ink or glue.
Packages must be free of all foreign matter.
VI.   PROVISIONS CONCERNING MARKING

Each package must bear the following particulars in letters grouped on the same side, legibly and indelibly marked and visible from the outside:
A.   Identification

The name and the address of the packer and/or the dispatcher.
This mention may be replaced:






—


for all packages with the exception of pre-packages, by the officially issued or accepted code mark representing the packer and/or the dispatcher, indicated in close connection with the reference ‘Packer and/or Dispatcher’ (or equivalent abbreviations);










—


for pre-packages only, by the name and the address of a seller established within the Union indicated in close connection with the mention ‘Packed for:’ or an equivalent mention. In this case, the labelling shall also include a code representing the packer and/or the dispatcher. The seller shall give all information deemed necessary by the inspection body as to the meaning of this code.




B.   Nature of produce







—



                              ‘Tomatoes’ or ‘trusses of tomatoes’ and the commercial type if the contents are not visible from the outside. These details must always be provided for ‘cherry’ (or ‘cocktail’) tomatoes, whether in trusses or not.










—



                              ‘Mixture of tomatoes’, or equivalent denomination, in the case of a mixture of distinctly different varieties, commercial types and/or colours of tomatoes. If the produce is not visible from the outside, the colours, varieties or commercial types and the quantity of each in the package must be indicated.










—


Name of the variety (optional).




C.   Origin of produce

Country of origin (26) and, optionally, district where grown, or national, regional or local place name.
In the case of a mixture of distinctly different colours, varieties and/or commercial types of tomatoes of different origins, the indication of each country of origin shall appear next to the name of the colour, variety and/or commercial type concerned.
D.   Commercial specifications







—


Class.










—


Size (if sized) expressed as minimum and maximum diameters.




E.   Official control mark (optional)

Packages need not to bear the particulars mentioned in the first subparagraph, when they contain sales packages, clearly visible from the outside, and all bearing these particulars. These packages shall be free from any indications such as could mislead. When these packages are palletised, the particulars shall be given on a notice placed in an obvious position on at least two sides of the pallet.


(1)  The full or commonly used name shall be indicated.

(2)  A non-exhaustive list of varieties providing a classification on colouring and russeting is set out in the appendix to this standard.

(3)  Varieties marked with ‘R’ in the appendix to this standard are exempt from the provisions on russeting.

(4)  A non-exhaustive list of varieties providing a classification on colouring and russeting is set out in the appendix to this standard.

(5)  Varieties marked with ‘R’ in the appendix are exempt from the provisions on russeting.

(6)  Varieties marked with ‘R’ in the appendix to this standard are exempt from the provisions on russeting.

(7)  The full or commonly used name shall be indicated.

(8)  With minimum 20 % for Class I and Class II

(9)  However, for the variety Jonagold, at least one-tenth surface of the fruit in Class II must be streaked with red colouring.

(10)  Calculated as described in the OECD guidance on objective tests.

(11)  Sizes below 45 mm refer to clementines only.

(12)  The use of preserving agents or any other chemical substance liable to leave a foreign smell on the skin of the fruit is permitted where it is compatible with the applicable European Union provisions.

(13)  The use of preserving agents or any other chemical substance liable to leave a foreign smell on the skin of the fruit is permitted where it is compatible with the applicable European Union provisions.

(14)  Seedless citrus fruit may occasionally contain seeds.

(15)  The full or commonly used name shall be indicated.

(16)  The full or the commonly used name shall be indicated.

(17)  The full or the commonly used name shall be indicated.

(18)  The full or the commonly used name shall be indicated.

(19)  A non-exhaustive list of large fruited and summer pear varieties is included in the appendix to this standard.

(20)  A non-exhaustive list of large fruited and summer pear varieties is included in the appendix to this standard.

(21)  The full or the commonly used name shall be indicated.

(22)  The full or the commonly used name shall be indicated.

(23)  Some sweet pepper varieties may have hot taste.

(24)  The full or the commonly used name shall be indicated.

(25)  The full or the commonly used name shall be indicated.

(26)  The full or the commonly used name shall be indicated.





ANNEX II

SPECIMEN MENTIONED IN ARTICLE 12(1)






Text of image

European Union marketing standard for fresh fruit and vegetables
No (of the approved trader)
(Member State)






ANNEX III

CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY WITH THE EUROPEAN UNION MARKETING STANDARDS FOR FRESH FRUIT AND VEGETABLES REFERRED TO IN ARTICLES 12, 13 AND 14






Text of image

1. Trader
Certificate of conformity with the European Union marketing standards applicable to fresh fruit and vegetables
No …
(This certificate is exclusively for the use of inspection bodies)
2. Packer identified on packaging (if other than trader)
3. Inspection body
4. Place of inspection/country of origin (1)
5. Region or country of destination
6. Identifier of means of transport
7.
internal
import
export
8. Packages (number and type)
–
–
9. Type of product (variety if the standard specifies)
10. Quality class
11. Total net weight in kg
12. The consignment referred to above conforms, at the issue time, with the European Union marketing standards in force.
Customs office foreseen …
Place and date of issue
Valid until (date): …
Signatory (name in block letters):
Signature …
Seal of the competent authority
13. Observations
(1) Where the goods are being re-exported, indicate the origin in box 9.






ANNEX IV

THIRD COUNTRIES WHERE THE CONFORMITY CHECKS HAVE BEEN APPROVED UNDER ARTICLE 15 AND THE PRODUCTS CONCERNED







Country


Products




Switzerland


Fresh fruit and vegetables other than citrus fruit




Morocco


Fresh fruit and vegetables




South Africa


Fresh fruit and vegetables




Israel


Fresh fruit and vegetables




India


Fresh fruit and vegetables




New Zealand


Apples, pears and kiwi fruit




Senegal


Fresh fruit and vegetables




Kenya


Fresh fruit and vegetables




Turkey


Fresh fruit and vegetables









ANNEX V

METHODS OF INSPECTION REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 17(1)

The following methods of inspection are based on the provisions of the guide for the implementation of quality control of fresh fruit and vegetables adopted by the OECD Scheme for the Application of International Standards for Fruit and Vegetables.
1.   DEFINITIONS
1.1.   Package

Individually packaged part of a lot, including contents. The packaging is conceived so as to facilitate handling and transport of a number of sales packages or of products loose or arranged, in order to prevent damage by physical handling and transport. The package may constitute a sales package. Road, rail, ship and air containers are not considered as packages.
1.2.   Sales package

Individually packaged part of a lot, including contents. The packaging of sales packages is conceived so as to constitute a sales unit to the final user or consumer at the point of purchase.
1.3.   Pre-packages

Pre-packages are sales packages such as the packaging enclosing the foodstuff completely or only partially, but in such a way that the contents cannot be altered without opening or changing the packaging. Protective films covering single produce are not considered as a pre-package.
1.4.   Consignment

Quantity of produce to be sold by a given trader found at the time of inspection and defined by a document. A consignment may consist of one or several types of produce; it may contain one or several lots of fresh, dry or dried fruit and vegetables.
1.5.   Lot

Quantity of produce which, at the time of inspection at one place, has similar characteristics with regard to:






—


packer and/or dispatcher,










—


country of origin,










—


nature of produce,










—


class of produce,










—


size (if the produce is graded according to size),










—


variety or commercial type (according to the relevant provisions of the standard),










—


type of packaging and presentation.




However, if during the conformity check of consignments as defined in point 1.4 it is difficult to distinguish between different lots and/or presentation of individual lots is not possible, all lots of a specific consignment may be treated as one lot if they are similar in regard to type of produce, dispatcher, country of origin, class and variety or commercial type, if this is provided for in the relevant marketing standard.
1.6.   Sampling

Collective samples taken temporarily from a lot during conformity check.
1.7.   Primary sample

Package taken at random from the lot, in case of packed produce or, in case of bulk produce (direct loading into a transport vehicle or compartment thereof), a quantity taken at random from a point in the lot.
1.8.   Bulk sample

Several primary samples supposed to be representative for the lot so that the total quantity is sufficient to allow the assessment of the lot with regard to all criteria.
1.9.   Secondary sample

An equal quantity of produce taken at random from the primary sample.
In the case of packed nuts, the secondary sample shall weigh between 300 g and 1 kg. If the primary sample is made up of packages containing sales packages, the secondary sample shall be one or more sales packages that in aggregate are at least 300 g.
In the case of other packed produce, the secondary sample shall comprise of 30 units, in case the net weight of the package is 25 kg or less and the package does not contain any sales packages. In certain cases this means that the whole content of the package has to be checked, if the primary sample contains not more than 30 units.
1.10.   Composite sample (dry and dried produce only)

A composite sample is a mix, weighing at least 3 kg, of all the secondary samples taken from the bulk sample. Produce in the composite sample shall be evenly mixed.
1.11.   Reduced sample

Quantity of produce taken at random from the bulk or composite sample having a size which is restricted to the minimum quantity necessary but sufficient to allow the assessment of certain individual criteria.
If the inspection method would destroy the produce, the size of the reduced sample shall not exceed 10 % of the bulk sample or, in the case of nuts in shell, 100 nuts taken from the composite sample. In the case of small dry or dried products (i.e. 100 g include more than 100 units) the reduced sample shall not exceed 300 g.
For the assessment of criteria on the degree of the development and/or ripeness, the constitution of the sampling shall be done according to the objective methods described in the Guidance on Objective Tests to Determine Quality of Fruit and Vegetables and Dry and Dried Produce.
Several reduced samples may be taken from a bulk or composite sample in order to check the conformity of the lot against different criteria.
2.   IMPLEMENTATION OF CONFORMITY CHECK
2.1.   General remark

A conformity check shall be made by assessing samples taken at random from different points in the lot to be controlled. It is based on the principle of presumption that the quality of the samples is representative of the quality of the lot.
2.2.   Place of control

A conformity check may be carried out during packing operation, at the point of dispatch, during transport, at the point of reception, at whole sale and retail level.
In cases where the inspection body does not carry out the conformity check in their own premises, the holder shall provide facilities enabling the conduct of a conformity check.
2.3.   Identification of lots and/or getting a general impression of the consignment

The identification of lots shall be carried out on the basis of their marking or other criteria, such as the indications laid down under Council Directive 89/396/EEC (1). In the case of consignments which are made up of several lots it is necessary for the inspector to get a general impression of the consignment with the aid of accompanying documents or declarations concerning the consignments. The inspector shall then determine how far the lots presented comply with the information in these documents.
If the produce is to be or has been loaded onto a means of transport, the registration number of the latter shall be used for identification of the consignment.
2.4.   Presentation of produce

The inspector shall decide which packages are to be checked. The presentation shall be made by the operator and shall include the presentation of the bulk sample as well as the supply of all information necessary for the identification of the consignment or lot.
If reduced or secondary samples are required, these shall be identified by the inspector from the bulk sample.
2.5.   Physical check







—


Assessment of packaging and presentation:
The packaging, including the material used within the package, shall be tested for suitability and cleanness according to the provisions of the relevant marketing standard. This shall be done on the basis of primary samples, in case of packed produce and in all other cases on the basis of the transport vehicle. If only certain types of packaging or presentation are permitted, the inspector shall check whether these are being used.










—


Verification of marking:
The inspector shall check whether the produce is marked according to the relevant marketing standard. This shall include a check on the accuracy of marking and/or the extent of any amendments required.
In case of packed produce, this check shall be carried out on the basis of the primary samples, in all other cases on the basis of the documents attached to the pallet or the transport vehicle.
Fruit and vegetables individually wrapped in plastic shall not be considered as pre-packed foodstuff in the meaning of European Parliament and Council Directive 2000/13/EC and shall not necessarily need to be marked in accordance with the marketing standards. In such cases, the plastic wrapping may be considered as a simple protection for fragile products.










—


Verification of conformity of the produce:
The inspector shall determine the size of the bulk sample in such way as to be able to assess the lot. The inspector selects at random the packages to be inspected or in the case of bulk produce the points of the lot from which individual samples shall be taken.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the removal of samples does not adversely affect the quality of the produce.
Damaged packages shall not be used as part of the bulk sample. They shall be set aside and may, if necessary, be subject to a separate examination and report.
The bulk sample shall comprise the following minimum quantities whenever a lot is declared unsatisfactory or the risk of a produce not conforming to the marketing standard has to be examined:






Packed produce




Number of packages in the lot


Number of packages to be taken (primary samples)




Up to 100


5 




From 101 to 300


7 




From 301 to 500


9 




From 501 to 1 000 


10 




More than 1 000 


15 (minimum)










Produce in bulk
(direct loading into a transport vehicle or compartment thereof)




Quantity of lot in kg or number of bundles in the lot


Quantity of primary samples in kg or number of bundles




Up to 200


10 




From 201 to 500


20 




From 501 to 1 000 


30 




From 1 001  to 5 000 


60 




More than 5 000 


100 (minimum)




In the case of bulky fruit and vegetables (over 2 kg per unit), the primary samples shall be made up of at least five units. In the case of lots comprising fewer than 5 packages or weighing less than 10 kg, the check shall cover the entire lot.
If the inspector discovers, after an inspection, that a decision cannot be reached, another physical check shall be undertaken and the overall result reported as an average of the two checks.




2.6.   Control of produce

In case of packed produce, the primary samples shall be used to check the general appearance of the produce, the presentation, the cleanliness of the packages and the labelling. In all other cases, these checks shall be done on basis of the lot or transport vehicle.
The produce shall be removed entirely from its packaging for the conformity check. The inspector may only dispense with this where the sampling is based on composite samples.
The inspection of uniformity, minimum requirements, quality classes and size shall be carried out on the basis of the bulk sample, or on the basis of the composite sample taking into account the explanatory brochures published by the OECD Scheme for the Application of International Standards for Fruit and Vegetables.
When defects are detected, the inspector shall ascertain the respective percentage of the produce not in conformity with the standard by number or weight.
External defects shall be checked on the basis of the bulk or composite sample. Certain criteria on the degree of development and/or ripeness or on the presence or absence of internal defects may be checked on the basis of reduced samples. The check based on the reduced sample applies in particular to checks which destroy the trade value of the produce.
The criteria on the degree of development and/or ripeness shall be checked using the instruments and methods laid down to this end in the relevant marketing standard or in accordance with the Guidance on Objective Tests to Determine Quality of Fruit and Vegetables and Dry and Dried Produce.
2.7.   Report of control results

Documents mentioned in Article 14 shall be issued, where appropriate.
If defects are found leading to non-conformity, the trader or his representative shall be informed in writing about these defects and the percentage found as well as the reasons for non-conformity. If the compliance of produce with the standard is possible by a change in marking, the trader or his representative shall be informed.
If defects are found in a product, the percentage found not to be in conformity with the standard shall be indicated.
2.8.   Decline in value by conformity check

After the conformity check, the bulk or composite sample is put at the disposal of the operator or his representative.
The inspection body shall not be bound to hand back the elements of the bulk or composite sample destroyed during the conformity check.


(1)  
            OJ L 186, 30.6.1989, p. 21.





ANNEX VI

PROCESSED PRODUCTS REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 50(3)








Category


CN Code


Description




Fruit juices


ex 2009 


Fruit juices, excluding grape juice and grape must of subheadings 2009 61  and 2009 69 , banana juice of subheading ex 2009 80  and concentrated juices, unfermented and not containing added spirit, whether or not containing added sugar or other sweetening matter.
Concentrated fruit juices are fruit juices coming under heading ex 2009  obtained by the physical removal of at least 50 % of the water content, in packings of a net content of not less than 200 kg.




Tomato concentrate


ex 2002 90 31 
ex 2002 90 91 


Tomato concentrate with a dry weight content of not less than 28 % in immediate packings of a net content of not less than 200 kg.




Frozen fruit and vegetables


ex 0710 


Vegetables (uncooked or cooked by steaming or boiling in water) frozen, excluding sweetcorn of subheading 0710 40 00 , olives of subheading 0710 80 10  and fruits of the genus Capsicum or of the genus Pimenta of subheading 0710 80 59 .




ex 0811 


Fruit and nuts, uncooked or cooked by steaming or boiling in water, frozen, not containing added sugar or other sweetening matter, excluding frozen bananas falling within subheading ex 0811 90 95 .




ex 2004 


Other vegetables prepared or preserved otherwise than by vinegar or acetic acid, frozen, other than the products of heading 2006 , excluding sweetcorn (Zea mays var. saccharata) of subheading ex 2004 90 10 , olives of subheading ex 2004 90 30  and potatoes prepared or preserved in the form of flour, meal or flakes of subheading 2004 10 91 .




Canned fruit and vegetables


ex 2001 


Vegetables, fruit, nuts and other edible parts of plants, prepared or preserved by vinegar or acetic acid, excluding:






—


fruit of the genus Capsicum other than sweetpeppers or pimentos of subheading 2001 90 20 










—


sweetcorn (Zea mays var. saccharata) of subheading 2001 90 30 










—


yams, sweet potatoes and similar edible parts of plants containing 5 % or more by weight of starch of subheading 2001 90 40 










—


palm hearts of subheading 2001 90 60 










—


olives of subheading 2001 90 65 










—


vine leaves, hop shoots and other similar edible parts of plants falling within subheading ex 2001 90 97 .








ex 2002 


Tomatoes prepared or preserved otherwise than by vinegar or acetic acid excluding tomato concentrate of subheadings ex 2002 90 31  and ex 2002 90 91  described above.




ex 2005 


Other vegetables prepared or preserved otherwise than by vinegar or acetic acid, not frozen, other than products of heading 2006  excluding olives of subheading 2005 70 , sweetcorn (Zea mays var. saccharata) of subheading 2005 80 00  and fruit of the genus Capsicum, other than sweet peppers or pimentos of subheading 2005 99 10  and potatoes prepared or preserved in the form of flour, meal or flakes of subheading 2005 20 10 .




ex 2008 


Fruit, nuts and other edible parts of plants, otherwise prepared or preserved, whether or not containing added sugar or other sweetening matter or spirit, not elsewhere specified or included, excluding:






—


peanut butter of subheading 2008 11 10 










—


other nuts, otherwise prepared or preserved, whether or not containing added sugar or other sweetening matter, not elsewhere specified or included, of subheading ex 2008 19 










—


palm hearts of subheading 2008 91 00 










—


maize of subheading 2008 99 85 










—


yams, sweet potatoes and similar edible parts of plants, containing 5 % or more by weight of starch of subheading 2008 99 91 










—


vine leaves, hop shoots and other similar edible parts of plants falling within subheading ex 2008 99 99 










—


mixtures of banana otherwise prepared or preserved of subheadings ex 2008 92 59 , ex 2008 92 78 , ex 2008 92 93  and ex 2008 92 98 










—


bananas otherwise prepared or preserved of subheadings ex 2008 99 49 , ex 2008 99 67  and ex 2008 99 99 .








Canned mushrooms


2003 10 


Mushrooms of the genus Agaricus prepared or preserved otherwise than by vinegar or acetic acid.




Fruits provisionally preserved in brine


ex 0812 


Fruit and nuts, provisionally preserved in brine, but unsuitable in that state for immediate consumption, excluding bananas provisionally preserved falling within subheading ex 0812 90 98 .




Dried fruits


ex 0813 


Fruit, dried, other than that of headings 0801  to 0806 .




0804 20 90 


Dried figs.




0806 20 


Dried grapes.




ex 2008 19 


Other nuts, otherwise prepared or preserved, whether or not containing added sugar or other sweetening matter, not elsewhere specified or included, excluding tropical nuts and their mixtures.




Other processed fruit and vegetable


 


Processed fruit and vegetables listed in Part X of Annex 1 of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, different from the products listed in the categories above.




Processed aromatic herbs


ex 0910 


Dried thyme.




ex 1211 


Basil, melissa, mint, origanum vulgare (oregano/wild marjoram), rosemary, sage, dried, whether or not cut, crushed or powdered.




Paprika powder


ex 0904 


Pepper of the genus Piper; dried or crushed or ground fruits of the genus Capsicum or of the genus Pimenta, excluding sweet peppers falling within subheading 0904 20 10 .









ANNEX VII

STRUCTURE AND CONTENT OF A NATIONAL STRATEGY FOR SUSTAINABLE OPERATIONAL PROGRAMMES REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 55(1)

1.   Duration of the national strategy
To be indicated by the Member State.
2.   Analysis of the situation in terms of strengths and weaknesses and potential for development, the strategy chosen to meet them and the justification of the priorities chosen as referred to in Article 103f(2)(a) and (b) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.
2.1.   Analysis of the situation
Describe the current situation of the fruit and vegetable sector using quantified data, highlighting strengths and weaknesses, disparities, needs and gaps and potential for development on the basis of the relevant common baseline indicators defined in Annex VIII and of other relevant additional indicators. This description shall concern at least:






—


the performances of the fruit and vegetable sector, including key trends: strengths and weaknesses of the sector, including in terms of competitiveness, and the potential for development of the producer organisations,










—


the environmental effects (impacts/pressures and benefits) of the fruit and vegetable production, including key trends.




2.2.   The strategy chosen to meet strengths and weaknesses
Describe the key areas where intervention is expected to bring the maximum value added:






—


relevance of the objectives set for the operational programmes and of the related expected results and targets to the (priority) needs identified, and the extent to which they can be realistically achieved,










—


internal coherence of the strategy, and existence of mutually reinforcing interactions and absence of possible conflicts and contradictions between the operational objectives of different actions selected,










—


complementarity and consistency of the actions selected, and with other national or regional actions, and in particular with activities supported through Union funds, and in particular with the rural development measures,










—


expected results and impact against the baseline situation, and their contribution to Union objectives.




2.3.   Impact from the previous operational programmes (when available)
Describe, where appropriate, the impact of operational programmes implemented in the recent past. Present a summary of the available results.
3.   Objectives of operational programmes and instruments, performance indicators as referred to in Article 103f(2)(c) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.
Describe the types of actions selected as eligible for support (non-exhaustive list) and indicate what are the objectives pursued, verifiable targets and the indicators that allow the progress towards achievement of the objectives, efficiency and effectiveness to be assessed.
3.1.   Requirements concerning all or several types of actions
Criteria and administrative rules adopted for ensuring that certain actions selected as eligible for support are not also supported by other relevant instruments of the common agricultural policy, and in particular by rural development support.
Effective safeguards in place, in application of Article 103c(5) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, to protect the environment from possible increased pressures coming from investments supported under operational programmes and eligibility criteria adopted in application of Article 103f(1) of that Regulation, for ensuring that investments on individual holdings supported under operational programmes respect the objectives set out in Article 191 of the Treaty and in the Sixth Community Environment Action Programme.
3.2.   Specific information required for types of actions (to be filled only for the types of actions selected)
The following specific information is required for the actions envisaged:
3.2.1.   Actions aimed at planning of production (non-exhaustive list)
3.2.1.1.   Acquisition of fixed assets






—


types of investments eligible for support (including type of fixed assets concerned),










—


other forms of acquisition eligible for support, e.g. renting, leasing (including type of fixed assets concerned),










—


details on eligibility conditions for support.




3.2.1.2.   Other actions






—


description of the types of actions eligible for support,










—


details on eligibility conditions for support.




3.2.2.   Actions aimed at improving or maintaining product quality (non-exhaustive list)
3.2.2.1.   Acquisition of fixed assets






—


types of investments eligible for support (including type of fixed assets concerned),










—


other forms of acquisition eligible for support, e.g. renting, leasing (including type of fixed assets concerned),










—


details on eligibility conditions for support.




3.2.2.2.   Other actions






—


description of the types of actions eligible for support,










—


details on eligibility conditions for support.




3.2.3.   Actions aimed at improving marketing (non-exhaustive list)
3.2.3.1.   Acquisition of fixed assets






—


types of investments eligible for support (including type of fixed assets concerned),










—


other forms of acquisition eligible for support, e.g. renting, leasing (including type of fixed assets concerned),










—


details on eligibility conditions for support.




3.2.3.2.   Other types of actions including promotion and communication activities other than in relation to crisis prevention and management






—


description of the types of actions eligible for support,










—


details on eligibility conditions for support.




3.2.4.   Research and experimental production (non-exhaustive list)
3.2.4.1.   Acquisition of fixed assets






—


types of investments eligible for support (including type of fixed assets concerned),










—


other forms of acquisition eligible for support, e.g. renting, leasing(including type of fixed assets concerned),










—


details on eligibility conditions for support.




3.2.4.2.   Other types of actions






—


description of the types of actions eligible for support,










—


details on eligibility conditions for support.




3.2.5.   Training types of actions (other than in relation to crisis prevention and management) and actions aimed at promoting access to advisory services (non-exhaustive list)






—


description of the types of actions eligible for support (including types of training and/or issues covered by the advisory service),










—


details on eligibility conditions for support.




3.2.6.   Crisis prevention and management measures






—


description of the types of actions eligible for support,










—


details on eligibility conditions for support.




3.2.7.   Environmental types of actions (non-exhaustive list)






—


confirmation that the environmental actions selected as eligible for support respect the requirements set out in the second subparagraph of Article 103c(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007,










—


confirmation that the support for eligible environmental actions respects the requirements set out in the fourth subparagraphs of Article 103c(3) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.




3.2.7.1.   Acquisition of fixed assets






—


types of investments eligible for support (including type of fixed assets concerned),










—


other forms of acquisition eligible for support, e.g. renting, leasing (including type of fixed assets concerned),










—


details on eligibility conditions for support including.




3.2.7.2.   Other types of actions






—


list of the environmental actions eligible for support,










—


description of the types of actions eligible for support, including the specific commitment or commitments that they entail, their justification based on their expected environmental impact in relation to environmental needs and priorities,










—


amounts of support, where relevant,










—


criteria adopted for calculating the support levels.




3.2.8.   Other types of actions (non-exhaustive list)
3.2.8.1.   Acquisition of fixed assets






—


types of investments eligible for support (including type of fixed assets concerned),










—


other forms of acquisition eligible for support, e.g. renting, leasing (including type of fixed assets concerned),










—


details on eligibility conditions for support.




3.2.8.2.   Other actions






—


description of the other types of actions eligible for support,










—


details on eligibility conditions for support.




4.   Designation of competent authorities and bodies responsible
Designation by the Member State of the national authority responsible for the management, monitoring and evaluation of the national strategy.
5.   A description of the monitoring and evaluation systems
These shall be constructed on the basis of the list of common performance indicators indicated in Annex VIII. Where deemed appropriate, the national strategy shall specify additional indicators reflecting national and/or regional needs, conditions and objectives specific to the national operational programmes.
5.1.   Assessment of the operational programmes and reporting obligations for producer organisations as referred to in Article 103f(2)(d) and (e) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.
Describe the monitoring and evaluation requirements and procedures in relation to operational programmes, including the reporting obligations for producer organisations.
5.2.   Monitoring and evaluation of the national strategy
Describe the monitoring and evaluation requirements and procedures in relation to the national strategy.





ANNEX VIII

List of common performance indicators referred to in Articles 59(a), 96(3)(a) and 125(2)

The system of common performance indicators related to actions undertaken by producer organisations, associations of producer organisations and their members under an operational programme does not necessarily capture all the factors that may intervene and affect the outputs, results and impact of an operational programme. In this context, the information provided by common performance indicators should be interpreted in the light of quantitative and qualitative information relating to other key factors contributing to the success or failure of the programme’s implementation.
1.   COMMON INDICATORS RELATING TO THE FINANCIAL EXECUTION (INPUT INDICATORS) (ANNUAL)







Measure


Type of action


Input indicators (annual)




Actions aimed at planning of production








a)


Purchase of fixed assets










b)


Other forms of acquisition of fixed assets, including renting, hiring and leasing










c)


Other actions






Expenditure (Euro)




Actions aimed at improving or maintaining product quality








a)


Purchase of fixed assets










b)


Other forms of acquisition of fixed assets, including renting, hiring and leasing










c)


Other actions






Expenditure (Euro)




Actions aimed at improving marketing








a)


Purchase of fixed assets










b)


Other forms of acquisition of fixed assets, including renting, hiring and leasing










c)


Promotion and communication activities (other than in relation to crisis prevention and management)










d)


Other actions






Expenditure (Euro)




Research and experimental production








a)


Purchase of fixed assets










b)


Other forms of acquisition of fixed assets, including renting, hiring and leasing










c)


Other actions






Expenditure (Euro)




Training actions (other than in relation to crisis prevention and management) and/or actions aimed at promoting access to advisory services


Based on the main issue covered:






a)


Organic production










b)


Integrated production or integrated pest management










c)


Other environmental issues










d)


Traceability










e)


Product quality, including pesticides residues










f)


Other issues






Expenditure (Euro)




Crisis prevention and management measures








a)


market withdrawal;










b)


green harvesting or non-harvesting of fruit and vegetables;










c)


promotion and communication activities;










d)


training actions;










e)


harvest insurance;










f)


support for the administrative costs of setting up mutual funds.






Expenditure (Euro)




Environmental actions








a)


Purchase of fixed assets










b)


Other forms of acquisition of fixed assets, including renting, hiring and leasing










c)


Other actions:






(1)


Production






i)


Organic production










ii)


Integrated production










iii)


Improved use and/or management of water, including water saving and draining










iv)


Actions to conserve soil (e.g., labour techniques to prevent/reduce soil erosion, green cover, conservation agriculture, mulching)










v)


Actions to create or maintain habitats favourable for biodiversity (e.g., wetlands) or to maintain the landscape, including the conservation of historical features (e.g. stonewalls, terraces, small wood)










vi)


Actions favouring energy saving










vii)


Actions related to reduction of waste production and to improvement of waste management










viii)


Other actions














(2)


Transport










(3)


Marketing










Expenditure (Euro)




Other actions








a)


Purchase of fixed assets










b)


Other forms of acquisition of fixed assets, including renting, hiring and leasing










c)


Other actions






Expenditure (Euro)




2.   COMMON OUTPUT INDICATORS (ANNUAL)







Measure


Type of action


Output indicators (annual)




Actions aimed at planning of production








a)


Purchase of fixed assets






Number of holdings participating in the actions
Total value of investments (Euro) (1)











b)


Other forms of acquisition of fixed assets, including renting, hiring and leasing






Number of holdings participating in the actions










c)


Other actions






Number of holdings participating in the actions




Actions aimed at improving or maintaining product quality








a)


Purchase of fixed assets






Number of holdings participating in the actions.
Total value of investments (Euro) (1)











b)


Other forms of acquisition of fixed assets, including renting, hiring and leasing






Number of holdings participating in the actions










c)


Other actions






Number of holdings participating in the actions




Actions aimed at improving marketing








a)


Purchase of fixed assets






Number of holdings participating in the actions.
Total value of investments (Euro) (1)











b)


Other forms of acquisition of fixed assets, including renting, hiring and leasing






Number of holdings participating in the actions










c)


Promotion and communication activities (other than in relation to crisis prevention and management)






Number of actions undertaken (2)











d)


Other actions






Number of holdings participating in the actions




Research and experimental production








a)


Purchase of fixed assets






Number of holdings participating in the actions.
Total value of investments (Euro) (1)











b)


Other forms of acquisition of fixed assets, including renting, hiring and leasing






Number of holdings participating in the actions










c)


Other actions






Number of holdings participating in the actions (3)

Number of hectares concerned (4)





Training actions (other than in relation to crisis prevention and management) and/or actions aimed at promoting access to advisory services


Based on the main issue covered:


Number of days of training received by participants










a)


Organic production










b)


Integrated production or integrated pest management










c)


Other environmental issues










d)


Traceability










e)


Product quality, including pesticide residues










f)


Other issues






Number of holdings that use advisory services (5)





Crisis prevention and management measures








a)


market withdrawal;






Number of actions undertaken (6)











b)


green harvesting or non-harvesting of fruit and vegetables;






Number of actions undertaken (7)











c)


promotion and communication activities;






Number of actions undertaken (2)











d)


training actions;






Number of days of training received by participants










e)


harvest insurance;






Number of holdings participating in the actions










f)


support for the administrative costs of setting up mutual funds.






Number of actions undertaken (8)





Environmental actions








a)


Purchase of fixed assets (9)







Number of holdings participating in the actions
Total value of investments (Euro) (2)











b)


Other forms of acquisition of fixed assets, including renting, hiring and leasing (10)







Number of holdings participating in the actions










c)


Other actions






(1)


Production






i)


Organic production










ii)


Integrated production










iii)


Improved use and/or management of water, including water saving and draining










iv)


Actions to conserve soil (e.g., labour techniques to prevent/reduce soil erosion, green cover, conservation agriculture, mulching)










v)


Actions to create or maintain habitats favourable for biodiversity (e.g., wetlands) or to maintain the landscape, including the conservation of historical features (e.g. stonewalls, terraces, small wood)










vi)


Actions favouring energy saving










vii)


Actions related to reduction of waste production and to improvement of waste management










viii)


Other actions














Number of holdings participating in the actions
Number of hectares concerned










(2)


Transport










(3)


Marketing






Volume of marketed production concerned




Other actions








a)


Purchase of fixed assets






Number of holdings participating in the actions
Total value of investments (Euro) (1)











b)


Other forms of acquisition of fixed assets, including renting, hiring and leasing






Number of holdings participating in the actions










c)


Other actions






Number of holdings participating in the actions




3.   COMMON RESULT INDICATORS

Nota bene: Result indicators are to be notified only once the results are appreciated.






Measure


Result indicators (Measurement)




Actions aimed at planning of production


Change in total volume of marketed production (tons)
Change in unit value of marketed production (Euro/kg)




Actions aimed at improving or maintaining product quality


Change in volume of marketed production that meets the requirements of a specific ‘quality scheme’(tons) (11)

Change in unit value of marketed production (Euro/kg)
Estimated impact on production costs (Euro/kg)




Actions aimed at improving marketing


Change in total volume of marketed production (tons)
Change in unit value of marketed production (Euro/kg)




Research and experimental production


Number of new techniques, processes and/or products adopted since the beginning of the operational programme




Training actions (other than in relation to crisis prevention and management) and/or actions aimed at promoting access to advisory services


Number of people who completed the full training activity/programme
Number of holdings that use advisory services




Crisis prevention and management measures











a)


market withdrawal






Total volume of production subject to withdrawal (tons)










b)


green harvesting or non-harvesting of fruit and vegetables






Total area concerned by green harvesting or non-harvesting (ha)










c)


promotion and communication






Estimated change in volume of marketed production for products subject to the promotion/communication activities (tons)










d)


training actions






Number of people who completed the full training activity/programme










e)


harvest insurance






Total value of the insured risk (Euro)










f)


support for the administrative costs of setting up mutual funds






Total value of the mutual fund set up (Euro)




Environmental actions











a)


Purchase of fixed assets (12)







Estimated change in annual mineral fertiliser consumption/hectare, by type of fertiliser (N and P2O3) (tons/ha)
Estimated change in annual water use/hectare (m3/ha)
Estimated change in annual use of energy by type of energy source or type of fuel (Litres/m3/Kwh per ton of marketed production)










b)


Other forms of acquisition of fixed assets, including renting, hiring and leasing (13)















c)


Other actions
















(1)


Production






Estimated change in annual volume of waste generated (tons per ton of marketed production)
Estimated change in annual use of packaging (tons per ton of marketed production)










(2)


Transport






Estimated change in annual use of energy by type of energy source or type of fuel (Litres/m3/Kwh per ton of marketed production)










(3)


Marketing






Estimated change in annual volume of waste generated (tons per ton of marketed production)
Estimated change in annual use of packaging (tons per ton of marketed production)




Other actions


Change in total volume of marketed production (tons)
Change in unit value of marketed production (Euro/kg)
Estimated impact on production costs (Euro/kg)





Notes: the reference for changes is the situation existing at the start of the programme.




4.   COMMON IMPACT INDICATORS

Nota bene: Impact indicators are to be notified only once the impact is appreciated.







Measure


Overall objectives


Impact indicators (Measurement)




Actions aimed at planning of production


Improving competitiveness
Improving attractiveness of producer organisation’s membership


Estimated change in total value of marketed production (Euro)
Change in the total number of fruit and vegetable producers who are active members (14) of the OP/APO concerned (number)
Change in the total area under fruit and vegetable production cropped by members of the OP/APO concerned (ha)




Actions aimed at improving or maintaining product quality




Actions aimed at improving marketing




Research and experimental production




Training actions (other than in relation to crisis prevention and management) and/or actions aimed at promoting access to advisory services




Crisis prevention and management measures




Environmental actions


Maintaining and protecting the environment:


 










—


Soil






not defined










—


Water quality






Estimated change in total mineral fertiliser consumption, by type of fertiliser (N and P2O3) (tons)










—


Sustainable use of water resources






Estimated change in total water use (m3)










—


Habitat and biodiversity






not defined










—


Landscape






not defined










—


Climate change mitigation






Estimated change in total use of energy, by type of energy source or type of fuel (Litres/m3/Kwh)










—


Waste reduction






Estimated change in total volume of waste generated (tons)
Estimated change in use of packaging (tons)




Other actions


Improving competitiveness
Improving attractiveness of producer organisation’s membership


Estimated change in total value of marketed production (Euro)
Change in the total number of fruit and vegetable producers who are active members (14) of the OP/APO concerned (number)
Change in the total area under fruit and vegetable production cropped by members of the OP/APO concerned (ha)





Notes: the reference for changes is the situation existing at the start of the programme.




5.   COMMON BASELINE INDICATORS

Nota bene: Baseline indicators are needed in the analysis of the situation at the start of the programming period. Certain common baseline indicators are only relevant for the individual operational programmes at the level of producer organisations (e.g., volume of the production marketed at less than 80 % of the average price received by the PO/APO). Other common baseline indicators are also relevant for the national strategies at the level of the Member States (e.g., total value of marketed production).
As a general rule, baseline indicators are to be calculated as three year averages. If data are not available, they should be calculated at least with data related to one year.







Objectives


Baseline indicators related to objectives




Indicator


Definition (and measurement)





Overall objectives






Improving competitiveness


Total value of marketed production


Total value of marketed production of the producer organisation (PO)/association of POs (APO) (Euro)




Improving the attractiveness of the producer organisation’s membership


Number of fruit and vegetable producers who are active members of the PO/APO concerned


Number of fruit and vegetable producers who are active member (15) of the PO/APO




Total area under fruits and vegetable production cropped by members of the PO/APO concerned


Total area under fruit and vegetable production cropped by members of the PO/APO (ha)




Maintaining and protecting the environment


not defined


 





Specific objectives






Promoting concentration of supply


Total volume of marketed production


Total volume of marketed production of the PO/APO (tons)




Promoting the placing on the market of products produced by the members




Ensuring that production is adjusted to demand in terms of quality and quantity


Volume of the marketed production that meets the requirements of a specific ‘quality scheme’ (16) by main types of ‘quality schemes’ concerned (tons)




Optimising production costs


not defined


 




Boosting products’ commercial value


Average unit value of marketed production


Total value of marketed production/Total volume of marketed production (Euro/kg)




Stabilising producer prices


not defined


 




Promoting knowledge and improving human potential


Number of people having participated in training activities


Number of people who completed a training activity/programme during the last three years (number)




 


Number of holdings using advisory services


Number of holdings, members of the PO/APO, using advisory services (number)




Developing technical and economic performances and promoting innovation


not defined


 





Specific objectives in the environmental area






Contributing to soil protection


Area at risk of soil erosion with anti-erosion measures


Area under fruit and vegetable production at risk of soil erosion (17) where anti-erosion measures are implemented (ha)




Contributing to maintaining and improving water quality


Area with reduction in use/better management of fertilisers


Area under fruit and vegetable production subject to reduction in use or better management of fertilisers (ha)




Contributing to sustainable use of water resources


Area with water saving measures


Area under fruit and vegetable production with water saving measures (ha)




Contributing to habitat and biodiversity protection


Organic production


Area under organic production of fruit and/or vegetables (ha)




Integrated production


Area under integrated production of fruit and/or vegetables (ha)




Other actions contributing to habitat and biodiversity protections


Area concerned by other actions contributing to habitat and biodiversity protection (ha)




Contributing to landscape conservation


not defined


 




Contributing to climate change mitigation - Production


Greenhouse heating - energy efficiency


Estimated annual consumption of energy for greenhouse heating purposes by type of energy source (Tons/Litres/m3/Kwh per ton of marketed production)




Contributing to climate change mitigation - Transport
Contributing to maintaining and improving air quality - Transport


Transport - energy efficiency


Estimated annual consumption of energy for internal transport purposes (18), by fuel type (Litres/m3/Kwh per ton of marketed production)




Reducing the volume of waste generated


not defined


 





Notes: PO means producer organisation; APO means association of producer organisations;






(1)  To be filled in only for the year when the investment is made.

(2)  Each day of a promotion campaign counts as one action.

(3)  Only in case of actions relating to experimental production in plots belonging to member holdings.

(4)  Only in case of actions relating to experimental production in plots belonging to member holdings and/or to the producer organisation.

(5)  Whatever is the source of the advice (i.e. through an advisory service developed by the OP or by external services) and the specific issue covered by the advice.

(6)  Market withdrawal of the same product in different periods of the year and market withdrawal of different products count as different actions. Each market withdrawal operation for a given product counts as one action.

(7)  Green-harvesting and non-harvesting of different products count as different actions. Green harvesting and non-harvesting of the same product count as one action, regardless of the number of days they take, the number of holdings participating and the number of plots or hectares concerned.

(8)  Actions relating to the setting up of different mutual funds count as different actions.

(9)  Including non-productive investments linked to the achievement of commitments undertaken under other environmental actions.

(10)  Including other forms of acquisitions of fixed assets linked to the achievement of commitments undertaken under other environmental actions.

(11)  
            ‘Quality’ requirements are intended here to consist of a set of detailed obligations concerning the production methods (a) the respect of which is subject to independent inspection, and (b) that result in a final product the quality of which (i) goes significantly beyond the normal commercial standards as regards public health, plant health or environmental standards and (ii) responds to current and foreseeable market opportunities. It is proposed that the main types of ‘quality schemes’ cover the following: (a) certified organic production; (b) protected geographical indications and protected designations of origin, (c) certified integrated production, (d) private certified product quality schemes.

(12)  Including non-productive investments linked to the achievement of commitments undertaken under other environmental actions.

(13)  Including other forms of acquisitions of fixed assets linked to the achievement of commitments undertaken under other environmental actions.

(14)  Active members are members who deliver products to the PO/APO.

(15)  Active members are members who deliver products to the PO/APO.

(16)  
            ‘Quality’ requirements are intended here to consist of a set of detailed obligations concerning the production methods (a) the respect of which is subject to independent inspection, and (b) that result in a final product the quality of which (i) goes significantly beyond the normal commercial standards as regards public health, plant health or environmental standards and (ii) responds to current and foreseeable market opportunities. The main types of ‘quality schemes’ shall cover the following: (a) certified organic production; (b) protected geographical indications and protected designations of origin, (c) certified integrated production, (d) private certified product quality schemes.

(17)  
            ‘At risk of soil erosion’ shall mean any sloping plot with an inclination higher than 10 %, whether or not anti-erosion measures (e.g., soil cover, crop rotation, etc) have been taken on it. Where the relevant information is available, a Member State may instead use the following definition: ‘At risk of soil erosion’ shall mean any plot with a predicted loss of soil exceeding the rate of natural soil formation, whether or not anti-erosion measures (e.g., soil cover or crop rotation) have been taken on it.

(18)  Internal transport refers to transport of products from member holdings for delivery to the PO/APO.





ANNEX IX

LIST OF ACTIONS AND EXPENDITURE NOT ELIGIBLE UNDER OPERATIONAL PROGRAMMES REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 60(1)









1.


General production costs and, in particular, plant protection products, including integrated control materials, fertilisers and other inputs; packing costs, storage costs, packaging costs, even as part of new processes, costs of packages; costs of collection or transport (internal or external); operating costs (in particular electricity, fuel and maintenance), except:






—


specific costs for quality improvement measures. In all cases costs for (even certified) mycelium, seeds and non-perennial plants shall not be eligible;










—


specific costs for biological plant protection materials (such as pheromones and predators) whether used in organic, integrated or conventional production;










—


specific costs for transport, sorting and packing related to free distribution as referred to in Articles 81 and 82;










—


specific costs for environmental measures, including costs generated by the environmental management of packaging;










—


specific costs for organic, integrated or experimental production, including specific costs for organic seeds and seedlings. The competent authority of the Member State shall lay down the eligibility criteria for an experimental production taking account of the newness of the procedure or concept and the risk involved;










—


specific costs to ensure the monitoring of compliance with the standards referred to in Title II of this Regulation, with plant-health rules and with maximum level of residues.




Specific costs shall mean the additional costs, calculated as the difference between the conventional costs and the costs actually incurred.
For each category of eligible specific costs referred to above, in order to calculate additional costs compared with conventional ones, Member States may fix, in a duly justified way, standard flat rates.












2.


Administrative and personnel costs with the exception of expenditure relating to the implementation of operational funds and operational programmes which shall include:






(a)


overheads specifically related to the operational fund or operational programme, including management and personnel costs, reports and evaluation studies, and the costs of keeping accounts and the management of accounts, by means of the payment of a standard flat rate up to a maximum of 2 % of the operational fund as approved in accordance with Article 64 and up to a maximum of EUR 180 000, comprising both the EU contribution and the producer organisation contribution.
In the case of operational programmes submitted by recognised associations of producer organisations, overheads shall be calculated as the addition of the overheads of each producer organisation as provided for in the first paragraph but limited to a maximum of EUR 1 250 000 per association of producer organisations.
Member States may restrict funding to the real costs, in which case they should define the eligible costs;










(b)


personnel costs including charges linked to wages and salaries, if these are directly borne by the producer organisation, association of producer organisation or subsidiaries as referred to in Article 50(9) resulting from measures:






(i)


to improve or maintain a high level of quality or environmental protection;










(ii)


to improve the level of marketing.




The implementation of these measures shall essentially involve the use of qualified personnel. If, in such cases, the producer organisation uses its own employees or producer members, the time worked shall be documented.
If a Member State wishes to provide an alternative to restricting funding to the real costs, for all the eligible personnel costs referred to above, it shall fix, ex ante and in a duly justified way, standard flat rates up to a maximum of 20 % of the approved operational fund. This percentage may be increased in duly justified cases.
In order to request those standard flat rates, producer organisations shall furnish proof of the implementation of the action to the satisfaction of the Member State.










(c)


legal and administrative costs of mergers of producer organisations or their acquisition, as well as legal and administrative costs related to creating transnational producer organisations or transnational associations of producer organisations; feasibility studies and proposals commissioned by producer organisations in this respect.
















3.


Income or price supplements outside crisis prevention and management.












4.


Insurance costs outside the harvest insurance measures referred to in Section 6 of Chapter III of Title III.












5.


Reimbursement of loans taken out for an operation carried out before the beginning of the operational programme other than those referred to in Articles 48(4), 49(3) and 74.












6.


Purchase of land costing more than 10 % of all the eligible expenditure on the operation concerned and not built on except where purchase is necessary to carry out an investment included in the operational programme; in exceptional and duly justified cases, a higher percentage can be fixed for operations concerning environmental conservation.












7.


Costs of meetings and training programmes except where they are related to the operational programme, including daily allowances, transport and accommodation costs, where appropriate, on a flat-rate basis.












8.


Operations or costs relating to the quantities produced by the members of the producer organisation outside the Union.












9.


Operations that could distort competition in the other economic activities of the producer organisation.












10.


Second hand equipment which has been purchased with Union or national support within the seven previous years.












11.


Investments in means of transport to be used for marketing or distribution by the producer organisation, with the exception of:






(a)


investments in means of internal transport; at the moment of the purchase, the producer organisation shall duly justify to the concerned Member State that the investments shall only be used for internal transport;










(b)


additional on-the-truck facilities for cold-storage or controlled atmosphere transport.
















12.


Hire except where economically justified as an alternative to purchase at the satisfaction of the Member State.












13.


Operating costs of goods hired.












14.


Expenditure linked to leasing contracts (taxes, interest, insurance costs, etc.) and operating costs, except:






(a)


the leasing itself, within the limits of the net market value of the item and within the conditions laid down in point (b) of the first subparagraph of Article 55(1) of Regulation (EC) No 1974/2006;










(b)


the leasing of second hand equipment which has not received Union or national support within the seven previous years.
















15.


Promotion of individual commercial labels or labels containing geographic references except:






—


brands/trademarks of producer organisation, associations of producer organisations and subsidiaries in the situation referred to in Article 50(9),










—


generic promotion and promotion of quality labels,










—


costs for promotional printing on packaging or on labels under any of the two previous indents on the condition that it is provided for in the operational programme




Geographical names are allowed only if:






(a)


they are a protected designation of origin or a protected geographical indication, covered by Council Regulation (EC) No 510/2006 (1); or










(b)


in all cases where the provision of point (a) does not apply, these geographical names are secondary to the principal message.




Promotional material for generic promotion and promotion of quality labels shall bear the emblem of the European Union (in the case of visual media only) and include the following legend: ‘Campaign financed with the aid of the European Union’. Producer organisations, associations of producer organisations and those subsidiaries in the situation referred to in Article 50(9) shall not use the emblem of the European Union in promotion of their brands/trademarks.












16.


Subcontracting or outsourcing contracts relating to the operations or expenditure mentioned as not eligible in this list.












17.


VAT except non-recoverable VAT as referred to in Article 71(3)(a) of Regulation (EC) No 1698/2005.












18.


Any national or regional taxes or fiscal levies.












19.


Interest on debt except where the contribution is made in a form other than a non-repayable direct assistance.












20.


Real estate purchase which has been purchased with Union or national support within the 10 previous years.












21.


Investments in shares of companies if the investment represents a financial investment except investments contributing directly to the achievement of the goals of the operational programme.












22.


Costs incurred by parties other than the producer organisation or its members and associations of producer organisations or their producer members or subsidiaries in the situation referred to in Article 50(9).












23.


Investments or similar types of actions not on the holdings and/or premises of the producer organisation, association of producer organisations, or their producer members or a subsidiary in the situation referred to in Article 50(9).












24.


Measures outsourced by the producer organisation outside the Union.






(1)  
            OJ L 93, 31.3.2006, p. 12.





ANNEX X

MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR WITHDRAWAL OF PRODUCTS REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 76(2)









1.


The products shall be:






—


whole,










—


sound; products affected by rotting or deterioration such as to make them unfit for consumption are excluded,










—


clean, practically free from any visible foreign matter,










—


practically free from pests and damage caused by pests,










—


free of abnormal external moisture,










—


free of any foreign taste and/or smell.
















2.


Products must be sufficiently developed and ripe, taking account of their type.












3.


Products must be characteristic of the variety and/or commercial type.









ANNEX XI

MAXIMUM AMOUNTS OF SUPPORT FOR MARKET WITHDRAWALS AS REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 79(1)







Product


Maximum support (EUR/100 kg)




Cauliflowers


10,52 




Tomatoes


7,25 




Apples


13,22 




Grapes


12,03 




Apricots


21,26 




Nectarines


19,56 




Peaches


16,49 




Pears


12,59 




Aubergines


5,96 




Melons


6,00 




Watermelons


6,00 




Oranges


21,00 




Mandarins


19,50 




Clementines


19,50 




Satsumas


19,50 




Lemons


19,50 









ANNEX XII

TRANSPORT COSTS UNDER FREE DISTRIBUTION REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 81(1)







Distance between the place of withdrawal and the place of delivery


Transport costs (EUR/t) (1)





Less than 25 km


18,2 




From 25 km to 200 km


41,4 




From 200 km to 350 km


54,3 




From 350 km to 500 km


72,6 




From 500 km to 750 km


95,3 




750 km or more


108,3 






(1)  Supplement for refrigerated transport: EUR 8,5/t.





ANNEX XIII
PART A

SORTING AND PACKING COSTS REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 82(1)







Product


Sorting and packing costs (EUR/t)




Apples


187,7 




Pears


159,6 




Oranges


240,8 




Clementines


296,6 




Peaches


175,1 




Nectarines


205,8 




Watermelons


167,0 




Cauliflowers


169,1 




Other products


201,1 




PART B

STATEMENT FOR PACKAGING OF PRODUCTS REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 82(2)







—


Продукт, предназначен за безплатна дистрибуция (Регламент за изпълнение (ЕC) № )










—


Producto destinado a su distribución gratuita [Reglamento de ejecución (UE) no ]










—


Produkt určený k bezplatné distribuci [prováděcí nařízení (EU) č. ]










—


Produkt til gratis uddeling (gennemførelsesforordning (EU) nr. )










—


Zur kostenlosen Verteilung bestimmtes Erzeugnis (Durchführungsverordnung (EU) Nr. )










—


Tasuta jagamiseks mõeldud tooted [rakendusmäärus (EL) nr ]










—


Προϊόν προοριζόμενο για δωρεάν διανομή [εκτελεστικός κανονισμός (ΕE) αριθ. ]










—


Product for free distribution (Implementing Regulation (EU) No )










—


Produit destiné à la distribution gratuite [règlement d’exécution (UE) no ]










—


Prodotto destinato alla distribuzione gratuita [regolamento di esecuzione (UE) n. ]










—


Produkts paredzēts bezmaksas izplatīšanai [Īstenošanas regula (ES) Nr. ]










—


Nemokamai platinamas produktas [Įgyvendinimo reglamentas (ES) Nr. ]










—


Ingyenes szétosztásra szánt termék (/EU végrehajtási rendelet)










—


Prodott destinat għad-distribuzzjoni bla ħlas [Regolament ta’ implimentazzjoni (UE) nru. ]










—


Voor gratis uitreiking bestemd product (Uitvoeringserordening (EU) nr. )










—


Produkt przeznaczony do bezpłatnej dystrybucji [Rozporządzenie wykonawcze (UE) nr ]










—


Produto destinado a distribuição gratuita [Regulamento de execução (UE) n.o ]










—


Produs destinat distribuirii gratuite [Regulamentul de punere în aplicare (UE) nr. ]










—


Výrobok určený na bezplatnú distribúciu [vykonávacie nariadenie (EÚ) č. ]










—


Proizvod, namenjen za prosto razdelitev [Izvedbena uredba (EU) št. ]










—


Ilmaisjakeluun tarkoitettu tuote (täytäntöönpanoasetus (EU) N:o )










—


Produkt för gratisutdelning (genomförandeförordning (EU) nr )









ANNEX XIV

Information to be included in the annual report of Member States as referred to in Article 97(b)

All information shall be that related to the year being reported on. It shall include information on expenditure paid after the end of the year being reported on. It shall cover information on checks executed and sanctions applied in respect of that year including those executed or applied after that year. Information (which varies during the year) shall be that valid on 31 December of the year reported on.
PART A —   INFORMATION FOR MARKET MANAGEMENT

1.   Administrative information








(a)


National legislation adopted in order to implement Section IVa of Chapter IV of Title I and Section IA of Chapter II of Title II of Part II of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, including the national strategy for sustainable operational programmes applicable to operational programmes implemented in the year being reported on.












(b)


The Member States contact point for notifications.












(c)


Information on producer organisations and associations of producer organisations and producer groups:






—


code number;










—


name and contact details;










—


date of recognition (preliminary recognition in case of producer groups);










—


all the legal entities or clearly defined parts of legal entities involved and all subsidiaries involved;










—


number of members (broken down between producers and non-producers) as well as changes in membership during the year;










—


area under fruit and vegetable production (total and broken down into main crops), product coverage and description of the final products sold (with the indication of their value and volume according to the main sources), and the main destinations of the products, by value (with details concerning the products marketed for the fresh market, the products sold for processing and the products that were withdrawn from the market);










—


changes in structures during the year, in particular: newly recognised or formed bodies, withdrawals and suspensions of recognitions, mergers with dates of these events.
















(d)


Information on interbranch organisations:






—


name of the organisation and contact details;










—


date of recognition;










—


product coverage.








2.   Information related to expenditures








(a)


Producer organisations. Financial data per beneficiary (producer organisation or association of producer organisations):






—


operational fund: total amount, contributions from Union, Member State (national assistance) and producer organisation and members;










—


description of the level of Union financial assistance under Article 103d of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007;










—


financial data of the operational program, broken out between producer organisations and associations of producer organisations;










—


value of marketed production: total and broken down into the different legal entities composing the producer organisation or association of producer organisations;










—


expenditure on the operational program, broken down by measures and types of action selected as eligible for support;










—


information on the volume of products withdrawn broken down by products and by months and between total volumes withdrawn from the market and volumes disposed of by way of free distribution, expressed in tonnes,










—


list of the approved bodies for the purposes of Article 103d(4) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.
















(b)


Producer groups. Financial data per beneficiary:






—


total amount, contributions from Union, Member State and producer group and members;










—


Member State contribution, showing sub-totals for producer groups in the first, second, third, fourth and fifth years of transition period;










—


expenditure on investments required to attain recognition under Article 103a(1)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007 with breakdown on Union, Member State and producer group contribution;










—


value of marketed production, with sub-totals for produce groups in the first, second, third, fourth and fifth years of transition period.








3.   Information on the implementation of the national strategy:






—


summary description of progress made in the implementation of the operational programmes, broken down between each type of measure as referred to in Article 19(1)(g). The description shall be based on financial and common output and result indicators and summarise the information provided in the annual progress reports transmitted by the producer organisations concerning the operational programmes;










—


if the Member State applies Article 182(6) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007, the State aid concerned shall be described;










—


a summary of the results of the mid-term evaluations of the operational programmes, as transmitted by the producer organisations including, where appropriate, the qualitative assessments of the results and impact of environmental actions aimed at the prevention of soil erosion, reductions in the use and/or better management of plant protection products, the protection of habitats and biodiversity or landscape conservation;










—


a summary of the major problems encountered in the implementation of the national strategy and its management and any measure taken including, where appropriate, an indication of whether the national strategy has been updated and the reason for the updating. A copy of the updated strategy shall be annexed to the annual report;










—


a summary of the analyses made pursuant to the second subparagraph of Article 110(1).




In 2012, the annual report shall also include the 2012 evaluation report referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 127(4).
4.   The list of approved first processors and collectors broken down by product, for the Member States which make use of the transitional arrangement referred to in Article 203a(6) of Regulation (EC) No 1234/2007.
PART B —   INFORMATION FOR THE CLEARANCE OF ACCOUNTS

5.   Information on checks and sanctions:






—


checks carried out by the Member State: details of bodies visited and dates of visiting;










—


checking rates;










—


results of checks;










—


sanctions applied.









ANNEX XV
PART A

Price notification referred to in Article 98(1)









Product


Type/variety


Presentation/size


Representative Markets




Tomatoes


Round


Size 57-100 mm, in bulk in packs of around 5-6 kg


Flanders (BE)
Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Almeria (ES)
Granada (ES)
Tenerife (ES)
Murcia (ES)
Rhône-Méditerranée (FR)
Bretagne (FR)
Budapest (HU)
Lecce (IT)
Vittoria (IT)
Westland (NL)
Kalisko-pleszewski (PL)
Algarve (PT)
Galați (RO)




Trusses


in bulk in packs of around 3-6 kg




Cherry


Trays of around 250-500 g




 


 




Apricots


All types and varieties


Size 45-50 mm
Trays or packs of around 6-10 kg


Sofia (BG)
Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Murcia (ES)
Valencia (ES)
Rhône-Méditerranée (FR)
Budapest (HU)
Napoli (IT)
Bologna (IT)




Nectarines


White flesh


Size A/B
Trays or packs of around 6-10 kg


Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Lleida (ES)
Zaragoza (ES)
Rhône-Méditerranée (FR)
Ravenna (IT)
Forli (IT)
Metaponoto (IT)




Yellow flesh


Size A/B
Trays or packs of around 6-10 kg




Peaches


White flesh


Size A/B
Trays or packs of around 6-10 kg


Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Lleida (ES)
Murcia (ES)
Huesca (ES)
Rhône-Méditerranée (FR)
Budapest (HU)
Caserta (IT)
Forli (IT)
Cova da Beira (PT)




Yellow flesh


Size A/B
Trays or packs of around 6-10 kg




Table grapes


Muscatel


Trays or packs of 1 kg


Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Alicante (ES)
Murcia (ES)
Rhône-Méditerranée (FR)
Sud-Ouest (FR)
Budapest (HU)
Bari (IT)
Taranto (IT)
Catania (IT)
Algarve (PT)




Chasselas




Alphonse Lavallée




Italia




Black magic




Red Globe




Victoria




Seedless (Sugarone/Thomson)




Pears


Blanquilla


Size 55/60, packs of around 5-10 kg


Flanders (BE)
Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Lleida (ES)
Zaragoza (ES)
Val de Loire — Centre (FR)
Budapest (HU)
Ferrara (IT)
Modena (IT)
Geldermalsen (NL)
Grójecko-warecki (PL)
Oeste (PT)




Conference


Size 60/65+, packs of around 5-10 kg




Williams


Size 65+/75+, packs of around 5-10 kg




Rocha




Abbé Fétel


Size 70/75, packs of around 5-10 kg




Kaiser




Doyenné du Comice


Size 75/90, packs of around 5-10 kg




Apples


Golden delicious


Size 70/80, packs of around 5-20 kg


Gleisdorf (AT)
Flanders (BE)
Praha (CZ)
Niedersachsen (DE)
Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Lleida (ES)
Rhône-Méditerranée (FR)
Val de Loire — Centre (FR)




Braeburn




Jonagold (or Jonagored)




Idared




Fuji




Shampion




Granny smith




Red delicious and other red varieties




Boskoop




Gala


Size 65/70, packs of around 5-20 kg


Sud-Ouest (FR)
Budapest (HU)
Trento (IT)
Bolzano (IT)
Geldermalsen (NL)
Grójecko-warecki (PL)
Lubelsko-sandomierski (PL)
Oeste (PT)
Mureș (RO)




Elstar




Cox orange




Satsumas


All varieties


Sizes 1-X - 2, packs of around 10-20 kg


Valencia (ES)




Lemons


All varieties


Sizes 3-4, packs of around 10 kg


Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Alicante (ES)
Murcia (ES)
Catania (IT)
Siracusa (IT)




Clementines


All varieties


Sizes 1-X - 3, packs of around 5-15 kg


Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Castellon (ES)
Valencia (ES)
Corigliano (IT)
Catania (IT)




Mandarins


All varieties


Sizes 1 - 2, packs of around 8-10 kg


Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Castellon (ES)
Valencia (ES)
Palermo (IT)
Siracusa (IT)
Algarve (PT)




Oranges


Salustiana


Size 6-9, packs of around 10-20 kg


Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Alicante (ES)
Valencia (ES)
Sevilla (ES)
Catania (IT)
Siracusa (IT)
Algarve (PT)




Navelinas




Navelate




Lanelate




Valencia late




Tarocco




Navel




Courgettes


All varieties


Size 14-21, loose in the pack


Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Almeria (ES)
Rhône-Méditerranée (FR)
Bari (IT)
Latina (IT)
Barendrecht (NL)




Cherries


All sweet varieties


Sizes 22 and over, loose in the pack


Sofia (BG)
Praha (CZ)
Rheinland-Pfalz (DE)
Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Zaragoza (ES)
Rhône-Méditerranée (FR)
Budapest (HU)
Bari (IT)
Grójecko-warecki (PL)
Cova da Beira (PT)
Iași (RO)




Cucumbers


Smooth varieties


Sizes 350-500 g, arranged in the pack


Sofia (BG)
Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Almeria (ES)
Val de Loire — Centre (FR)
Budapest (HU)
Bari (IT)
Vittoria (IT)
Barendrecht (NL)
Kalisko-pleszewski (PL)




Garlic


White


Size 50-80 mm, packs of around 2-5 kg


Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Cuenca (ES)
Cordoba (ES)
Sud-Ouest (FR)
Budapest (HU)
Rovigo (IT)




Violet




Plums


Greengage


Size 35 mm and over


Sofia (BG)
Baden-Würtemberg (DE)
Murcia (ES)
Sud-Ouest (FR)
Budapest (HU)
Modena (IT)
Grójecko-warecki (PL)
Argeș (RO)
Caraș-Severin (RO)




European plums
(President, Stanley, Cacanska, etc.)


Size 35 mm and over




Santa Rosa


Size 40 mm and over




Japanese plums (Golden Japan, etc.)


Size 40 mm and over




Sweet peppers


Square green


Size 70 mm and over


Sofia (BG)
Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Almeria (ES)
Murcia (ES)
Budapest (HU)
Brindisi (IT)
Vittoria (IT)
Westland (NL)
Oeste (PT)




Square coloured (red, yellow, etc.)




White


Size 50 mm and over




Elongated green


Size 40 mm and over




Lettuces


Iceberg


Size 400 g and over, packs of 8 - 12


Nordrhein-Westfalen (DE)
Athens (EL)
Thessaloniki (EL)
Almeria (ES)
Murcia (ES)
Rhône-Méditerranée (FR)
Bari (IT)
Grubbenvorst (NL)
Oeste (PT)
London (UK)




Other varieties of headed lettuce (including Batavia)


Size 400 g and over, packs of 8 -12




Strawberries


All varieties


Packs of 250 / 500 g


Flanders (BE)
Nordrhein-Westfalen (DE)
Huelva (ES)
Sud-Ouest (FR)
Salerno (IT)
Barendrecht (NL)
Płocki (PL)
Algarve (PT)
London (UK)




Cultivated mushrooms


Closed


Medium sized (30-65 mm)


La Rioja (ES)
Val de Loire – Centre (FR)
Dublin (IE)
Budapest (HU)
Barendrecht (NL)
Poznański (PL)
London (UK)




Kiwis


Hayward


Sizes 105-125 g, packs of around 3-10 kg


Athens (EL)
Sud-Ouest (FR)
Latina (IT)
Cuneo (IT)
Verona (IT)
Grande Porto (PT)




PART B

List of fruit and vegetables and other products referred to in Article 98(3)







—


cauliflowers;










—


asparagus;










—


egg plant (aubergines);










—


avocados;










—


carrots;










—


onions;










—


beans;










—


leeks;










—


water melons;










—


melons;










—


hazelnuts;










—


sour cherries;










—


cabbages;










—


potatoes.









ANNEX XVI

ENTRY PRICE SYSTEM SET OUT IN TITLE IV, CHAPTER I, SECTION 1

Without prejudice to the rules for the interpretation of the Combined Nomenclature, the description of the products is deemed to be indicative only. The scope of the arrangements provided for in the Title IV, Chapter I, Section 1 is, for the purposes of this Annex, determined by the scope of the CN codes as they exist at the time of the adoption of the latest amendment of this Regulation. Where ‘ex’ appears before the CN code, the scope of the additional duties is determined both by the scope of the CN code and that of the description of the products, and the corresponding period of application.
PART A







CN code


Description


Period of application




ex 0702 00 00 


Tomatoes


From 1 January to 31 December




ex 0707 00 05 


Cucumbers (1)



From 1 January to 31 December




ex 0709 90 80 


Artichokes


From 1 November to 30 June




0709 90 70 


Courgettes


From 1 January to 31 December




ex 0805 10 20 


Sweet oranges, fresh


From 1 December to 31 May




ex 0805 20 10 


Clementines


From 1 November to end of February




ex 0805 20 30 
ex 0805 20 50 
ex 0805 20 70 
ex 0805 20 90 


Mandarins (including tangerines and satsumas); wilking and similar citrus hybrids


From 1 November to end of February




ex 0805 50 10 


Lemons (Citrus limon, Citrus limonum)


From 1 June to 31 May




ex 0806 10 10 


Table grapes


From 21 July to 20 November




ex 0808 10 80 


Apples


From 1 July to 30 June




ex 0808 20 50 


Pears


From 1 July to 30 April




ex 0809 10 00 


Apricots


From 1 June to 31 July




ex 0809 20 95 


Cherries, other than sour cherries


From 21 May to 10 August




ex 0809 30 10 
ex 0809 30 90 


Peaches, including nectarines


From 11 June to 30 September




ex 0809 40 05 


Plums


From 11 June to 30 September







PART B







CN code


Description


Period of application




ex 0707 00 05 


Cucumbers intended for processing


From 1 May to 31 October




ex 0809 20 05 


Sour cherries (Prunus cerasus)


From 21 May to 10 August






(1)  Other than cucumbers referred to in Part B of this Annex.





ANNEX XVII

REPRESENTATIVE MARKETS REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 135







Member State(s)


Representative markets




Belgium and Luxembourg


Brussels




Bulgaria


Sofia




Czech Republic


Prague




Denmark


Copenhagen




Germany


Hamburg, Munich, Frankfurt, Cologne, Berlin




Estonia


Tallinn




Ireland


Dublin




Greece


Athens, Thessaloniki




Spain


Madrid, Barcelona, Seville, Bilbao, Zaragoza, Valencia




France


Paris-Rungis, Marseille, Rouen, Dieppe, Perpignan, Nantes, Bordeaux, Lyon, Toulouse




Italy


Milan




Cyprus


Nicosia




Latvia


Riga




Lithuania


Vilnius




Hungary


Budapest




Malta


Attard




Netherlands


Rotterdam




Austria


Vienna-Inzersdorf




Poland


Ozarów Mazowiecki-Bronisze, Poznan




Portugal


Lisbon, Porto




Romania


Bucharest, Constanța




Slovenia


Ljubljana




Slovakia


Bratislava




Finland


Helsinki




Sweden


Helsingborg, Stockholm




United Kingdom


London









ANNEX XVIII

ADDITIONAL IMPORT DUTIES AS REFERRED TO IN TITLE IV, CHAPTER I, SECTION 2

Without prejudice to the rules governing the interpretation of the Combined Nomenclature, the description of the products is deemed to be indicative only. The scope of the additional duties for the purposes of this Annex is determined by the scope of the CN codes as they exist at the time of the adoption of this Regulation.









Serial No


CN code


Description


Trigger period


Trigger level
(tonnes)




78.0015


0702 00 00 


Tomatoes








—


1 October to 31 May






481 625 




78.0020








—


1 June to 30 September






44 251 




78.0065


0707 00 05 


Cucumbers








—


1 May to 31 October






31 289 




78.0075








—


1 November to 30 April






26 583 




78.0085


0709 90 80 


Artichokes








—


1 November to 30 June






17 258 




78.0100


0709 90 70 


Courgettes








—


1 January to 31 December






57 955 




78.0110


0805 10 20 


Oranges








—


1 December to 31 May






368 535 




78.0120


0805 20 10 


Clementines








—


1 November to end of February






175 110 




78.0130


0805 20 30 
0805 20 50 
0805 20 70 
0805 20 90 


Mandarins (including tangerines and satsumas); wilkings and similar citrus hybrids








—


1 November to end of February






115 625 




78.0155


0805 50 10 


Lemons








—


1 June to 31 December






346 366 




78.0160








—


1 January to 31 May






88 090 




78.0170


0806 10 10 


Table grapes








—


21 July to 20 November






80 588 




78.0175


0808 10 80 


Apples








—


1 January to 31 August






916 384 




78.0180








—


1 September to 31 December






95 396 




78.0220


0808 20 50 


Pears








—


1 January to 30 April






229 646 




78.0235








—


1 July to 31 December






35 541 




78.0250


0809 10 00 


Apricots








—


1 June to 31 July






5 794 




78.0265


0809 20 95 


Cherries, other than sour cherries








—


21 May to 10 August






30 783 




78.0270


0809 30 


Peaches, including nectarines








—


11 June to 30 September






5 613 




78.0280


0809 40 05 


Plums








—


11 June to 30 September






10 293 









ANNEX XIX

CORRELATION TABLE REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 149







Regulation (EC) No 1580/2007


This Regulation




Article 1


Article 1




Article 2


Article 2




Article 2a


Article 3




Article 3


Article 4




Article 4


Article 5




Article 5


Article 6




Article 6


Article 7




Article 7


Article 8




Article 8


Article 9




Article 9


Article 10




Article 10


Article 11




Article 11


Article 12




Article 12


Article 13




Article 12a


Article 14




Article 13


Article 15




Article 14


—




Article 15


Article 16




Article 16


—




Article 17


—




Article 18


—




Article 19


—




Article 20


Article 17




Article 20a


Article 18




Article 21


Article 19




Article 22


Article 20




Article 23


Article 21




Article 24


Article 22




Article 25


Article 23




Article 26


Article 24




Article 27


Article 25




Article 28


Article 26




Article 29


Article 27




Article 30


Article 28




Article 31


Article 29




Article 32


Article 30




Article 33


Article 31




Article 34


Article 33




Article 35


—




Article 36


Article 34




Article 37


Article 35




Article 38


Article 36




Article 39


Article 37




Article 40


Article 38




Article 41


Article 39




Article 42


Article 40




Article 43


Article 41




Article 44


Article 42




Article 45


Article 43




Article 46


Article 44




Article 47


Article 45




Article 48


Article 46




Article 49


Article 47




Article 50


Article 48




Article 51


Article 49




Article 52


Article 50




Article 53


Article 51




Article 54


Article 52




Article 55


Article 53




Article 56


Article 54




Article 57


Article 55




Article 58


Article 56




Article 59


Article 57




Article 60


Article 58




Article 61


Article 59-60




Article 62


Article 61




Article 63


Article 62




Article 64


Article 63




Article 65


Article 64




Article 66


Article 65




Article 67


Article 66




Article 68


Article 67




Article 69


Article 68




Article 70


Article 69




Article 71


Article 70




Article 72


Article 71




Article 73


Article 72




Article 74


Article 73




Article 75


Article 74




Article 76


Article 75




Article 77


Article 76




Article 78


Article 77




Article 79


Article 78




Article 80


Article 79




Article 81


Article 80




Article 82


Article 81




Article 83


Article 82




Article 84


Article 83




Article 85


Article 84




Article 86


Article 85




Article 87


Article 86




Article 88


Article 87




Article 89


Article 88




Article 90


Article 89




Article 91


Article 90




Article 92


—




Article 93


Article 91




Article 94


Article 92




Article 94a


Article 93




Article 95


Article 94




Article 96


Article 95(4)




Article 97


Article 95




Article 98


Article 96




Article 99


Article 97




Article 100


Article 99




Article 101


Article 100




Article 102


Article 101




Article 103


Article 102




Article 104


Article 103




Article 105


Article 104




Article 106


Article 105(1)




Article 107


Article 105(2) and (3)




Article 108


Article 106




Article 109


Article 107




Article 110


Article 108




Article 111


Article 109




Article 112


Article 110




Article 113


Article 111




Article 114


Article 112




Article 115


Article 113




Article 116


Article 114




Article 117


Article 115




Article 118


Article 116




Article 119


Article 117




Article 120


Article 118




Article 121


Article 119




Article 122


Article 120




Article 123


Article 121




Article 124


Article 122




Article 125


Article 123




Article 126


Article 125




Article 127


Article 126




Article 128


Article 127




Article 129


Article 128




Article 130


Article 129




Article 131


Article 130




Article 132


Article 131




Article 133


Article 132




Article 134


—




Article 135


Article 133




Article 136


Article 134




Article 137


Article 135




Article 138


Article 136




Article 139


Article 137




Article 140


Article 138




Article 141


Article 139




Article 142


Article 140




Article 143


Article 141




Article 144


Article 142




Article 145


Article 143




Article 146


Article 144




Article 147


Article 145




Article 148


Article 146




Article 149


Article 147




Article 150


Article 148




Article 151


Article 149




Article 152


Article 150




Article 153


Article 151




Annex I


Annex I




Annex II


Annex II




Annex III


Annex III




Annex IV


Annex IV




Annex VI


Annex V




Annex VII


Annex VII




Annex VIII


Annex IX




Annex IX


Annex X




Annex X


Annex XI




Annex XI


Annex XII




Annex XII


Annex XIII




Annex XIII


Annex XIV




Annex XIV


Annex VIII




Annex XV


Annex XVI




Annex XVI


Annex XVII




Annex XVII


Annex XVIII




Annex XVIII


Annex XX









ANNEX XX

REGULATIONS REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 150(2)

Commission Regulation (EEC) No 1764/86 of 27 May 1986 laying down minimum quality requirements for products processed from tomatoes under the production aid scheme (1)

Commission Regulation (EEC) No 2320/89 of 28 July 1989 laying down minimum quality requirements for peaches in syrup and/or in natural fruit juice under the production aid scheme (2)

Article 2 and Parts A and B of Annex I of Commission Regulation (EC) No 464/1999 of 3 March 1999 laying down detailed rules for the application of Council Regulation (EC) No 2201/96 as regards aid arrangements for prunes (3)

Article 1(1) and (2) and Annexes II and III of Commission Regulation (EC) No 1573/1999 of 19 July 1999 laying down detailed rules for the application of Council Regulation (EC) No 2201/96 as regards the characteristics of dried figs qualifying for aid under the production aid scheme (4)

Annexes I and II of Commission Regulation (EC) No 1621/1999 of 22 July 1999 laying down detailed rules for the application of Council Regulation (EC) No 2201/96 as regards aid for the cultivation of grapes to produce certain varieties of dried grapes (5)

Commission Regulation (EC) No 1666/1999 of 28 July 1999 laying down detailed rules for the application of Council Regulation (EC) No 2201/96 as regards the minimum marketing characteristics for certain varieties of dried grapes (6)

Commission Regulation (EC) No 1010/2001 of 23 May 2001 concerning the minimum quality requirements for mixed fruit under the production aid scheme (7)

Article 3 of Commission Regulation (EC) No 217/2002 of 5 February 2002 fixing eligibility criteria for raw materials under the production aid scheme in Regulation (EC) No 2201/96 (8)

Article 2 of Commission Regulation (EC) No 1535/2003 of 29 August 2003 laying down detailed rules for applying Council Regulation (EC) No 2201/96 as regards the aid scheme for products processed from fruit and vegetables (9)

Article 16 and Annex I of Commission Regulation (EC) No 2111/2003 of 1 December 2003 laying down detailed rules for the application of Council Regulation (EC) No 2202/96 introducing a Community aid scheme for producers of certain citrus fruits (10)

Commission Regulation (EC) No 1559/2006 of 18 October 2006 laying down minimum quality requirements for Williams and Rocha pears in syrup and/or in natural fruit juice under the production aid scheme (11)



(1)  
            OJ L 153, 7.6.1986, p. 1.

(2)  
            OJ L 220, 29.7.1989, p. 54.

(3)  
            OJ L 56, 4.3.1999, p. 8.

(4)  
            OJ L 187, 20.7.1999, p. 27.

(5)  
            OJ L 192, 24.7.1999, p. 21.

(6)  
            OJ L 197, 29.7.1999, p. 32.

(7)  
            OJ L 140, 24.5.2001, p. 31.

(8)  
            OJ L 35, 6.2.2002, p. 11.

(9)  
            OJ L 218, 30.8.2003, p. 14.

(10)  
            OJ L 317, 2.12.2003, p. 5.

(11)  
            OJ L 288, 19.10.2006, p. 22.